CN117596656A

CN117596656A - Information transmission method and device

Info

Publication number: CN117596656A
Application number: CN202310154154.5A
Authority: CN
Inventors: 张天虹; 杨帆; 黄海宁; 李君瑶
Original assignee: Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Current assignee: Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date: 2022-08-12
Filing date: 2023-02-17
Publication date: 2024-02-23

Abstract

The embodiment of the application provides a method and a device for information transmission, wherein the method comprises the following steps: determining N candidate starting symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, wherein M symbols are included in the first time slot, and the M symbols include N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information. By the method, the receiving terminal device can determine the starting symbol of the transmission side line information, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the side line information due to the fact that the receiving terminal device adjusts each candidate starting symbol for transmitting the side line information can be avoided.

Description

Information transmission method and device

The present application claims priority from the chinese patent office, application number 202210970220.1, application name "method and apparatus for information transfer", filed on day 8 and 12 of 2022, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Technical Field

The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for information transmission.

Background

With the development of wireless communication technology, there is a growing need for proximity services with which surrounding people or things communicate, and by-pass unlicensed spectrum (sidelink on unlicensed spectrum, SL-U) technology has grown. SL-U is a new communication scenario for sidestream communication in standard Rel-18, the communication technology extends the communication scenario along the communication architecture of car-to-anything communication (vehicle to everything, V2X) to short-range communication between smart homes, wearable devices, cell phones, computers, for example.

However, in the sidestream SL transmission under the New air interface (New Radio NR), the terminal device can transmit the SL information only after the listen-before-talk (listen before talk, LBT) succeeds. But the time that the LBT succeeds is uncertain and may be at any one position in the slot. This results in difficulty in ensuring the reliability of the transmission of SL information by the terminal device in the slot after the LBT is successful (since automatic gain control (automatic gain control, AGC) adjustment is not performed). Although the above problem can be avoided by adding AGC symbols in the same slot, since the receiving terminal device does not know from which symbol in the slot the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting side information, this results in that the receiving terminal device needs to adjust at each AGC symbol, and if the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting SL information at the first AGC symbol, the receiving terminal device adjusts at the second AGC symbol, which results in that the receiving terminal device cannot determine the SL information transmitted at the second AGC symbol.

Disclosure of Invention

The embodiment of the application provides an information transmission method and device, wherein a receiving terminal device can determine a starting symbol of transmission side line information, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the side line information due to adjustment of each candidate starting symbol (second AGC symbol) for the transmission side line information can be avoided.

In a first aspect, there is provided an information transmission method, the method including: determining N candidate starting symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, wherein M symbols are included in the first time slot, and the M symbols include N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information.

The start symbol of the transmission side line information may be understood as the first symbol before the symbol that starts the transmission side line control information (physical sidelink control channel, PSCCH) and/or side line data information (physical sidelink control channel, PSCCH) resource allocation.

Optionally, the start symbol of the transmission side line information does not include a cyclic prefix extension (cyclic prefix extension, CPE), or the start symbol of the transmission side line information is the first symbol after the CPE, or the start symbol of the transmission side line information is the last symbol of the symbols where the CPE is located.

Optionally, the sidelink information may include duplicate information of PSCCH and PSSCH, three channels of PSCCH, physical sidelink feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH) and demodulation reference signals (demodulation reference signal, DMRS), channel state information reference signals (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), phase tracking reference signals (phase tracking reference signal, PT-RS),

At least one of signals including a side line synchronization signal and a PBCH block (sidelink synchronization signal and PBCH block, S-SSB). Optionally, the sidestream information does not include symbols for automatic gain control (automatic gain control, AGC).

Alternatively, the N candidate start symbols for transmission side row information may be understood as N AGC symbols.

Optionally, the M symbols include N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information, e.g., m=14, and further e.g., n=2 or 3.

It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the receiving terminal device may be referred to as a first terminal device, and the transmitting terminal device may be referred to as a second terminal device.

In this embodiment of the present invention, the receiving terminal device may receive the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of the start symbol in the N candidate start symbols for transmission sidestream information, and in this manner, the receiving terminal device may avoid the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the sidestream information caused by adjusting the start symbol (the second AGC symbol) for transmission sidestream information in each candidate.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: and performing Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on an ith symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein i is an integer smaller than M, and sidestream control information and/or demodulation reference signals do not exist in a first time range before the ith symbol.

Wherein, the absence of sidestream control information and/or demodulation reference signals in the first time range before the ith symbol can be understood as: the receiving terminal device does not detect or decode the sidelink control information and/or the demodulation reference signal within a first time range before the ith symbol.

Alternatively, the first time range may be understood as: a candidate start symbol for transmission side row information preceding the i-th symbol, and one or more symbols between the i-th symbol. For example, in the first slot, there are 2 candidate start symbols for transmission side line information, i.e., the ith symbol and the qth symbol, respectively, and the qth symbol is located before the ith symbol in the first slot, and then the first time range is one or more symbols between the qth symbol and the ith symbol. For another example, when m=14, the i-th symbol is symbol 7 and the q-th symbol is symbol 0, the first time range may be symbol interval {1,2,3}.

Alternatively, the first time range may start from the first symbol after the start symbol (e.g., the q-th symbol) of the candidate for transmission side line information before the i-th symbol.

Optionally, the end time of the first time range is no later than the last symbol before the i-th symbol.

Alternatively, the first time range may be configured by the network device to the first terminal device, or may be preconfigured by the network device to the first terminal device.

Alternatively, the first time range may be determined by at least 2 of a start position, an end position, a duration of the first time range.

In the embodiment of the application, the receiving terminal device can perform AGC on the ith symbol under the condition that the sidestream control information and/or the demodulation reference signal does not exist in the first time range before the ith symbol is judged, so that the reliability of sidestream information transmission is guaranteed.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: and not performing AGC on a j-th symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the j-th symbol is positioned after an i-th symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, sidestream control information and/or demodulation reference signals are detected in a second time range after the i-th symbol, and i and j are integers smaller than M.

Alternatively, the second time range may be understood as one or more symbols between the i-th symbol and the j-th symbol. For example, in the first slot, when m=14, the i symbol is symbol 0, the j symbol is symbol 4, and the second time range may be symbol interval {1,2}.

Alternatively, the second time range may start from the first symbol after the i-th symbol.

Optionally, the end time of the second time range is no later than the last symbol before the j-th symbol.

Alternatively, the second time range may be configured by the network device to the first terminal device, or may be preconfigured by the network device to the first terminal device.

Alternatively, the second time range may be determined by at least 2 of a start position, an end position, a duration of the first time range.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the receiving terminal device detects the sidelink control information and/or the demodulation reference signal in the second time range after the ith symbol, the receiving terminal device may not perform AGC adjustment on the jth symbol. In this way, the problem of failure to receive sidestream information transmitted on the jth symbol due to AGC adjustment performed again on the jth symbol can be avoided.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the start symbol is an i-th symbol, and the method further includes: and determining that the sidestream information transmitted on the jth symbol is sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information, wherein the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and the j are integers smaller than M.

The side row control information and/or the side row data information is side row information on the j-th symbol. The sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information may be transmitted over multiple symbols. Optionally, sidestream information of different content is transmitted over the plurality of symbols.

In this embodiment of the present invention, after determining that the i-th symbol is the start symbol of the transmission side line information, the receiving terminal device can transmit side line control information and/or side line data information on the j-th symbol.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, a position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

Illustratively, the fixed value may be preset, and the fixed value may belong to at least any one of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }.

Optionally, the position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value may be further understood as that the positions of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information are fixed values.

In the embodiment of the application, the position of the jth symbol in the first time slot is set to be a fixed value, so that the receiving terminal device can determine the position of the jth symbol in the first time slot according to the fixed value.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

For example, when n=2, the candidate start symbol for transmitting the side line information may be a first symbol and the second symbol, and when n=3, for example, the candidate start symbol for transmitting the side line information may be a first symbol, a first second symbol, and a second symbol.

Alternatively, both the first symbol and the second symbol may be AGC symbols. Optionally, the first symbol and the second symbol are both candidate AGC symbols.

Alternatively, the first symbol may be a first AGC symbol described in the embodiments of the present application, and the second symbol may be a second AGC symbol described in the embodiments of the present application.

Alternatively, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information may be understood as AGC symbols in the embodiments of the present application.

Optionally, the first symbol is located before the second symbol in the time domain. Optionally, the first symbol is a first symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to a first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

Illustratively, the value of the first field indicates that the j-th symbol in the first slot is located in any one of symbols 0 through 13, or the value of the first field indicates that the j-th symbol in the first slot is located in any one of symbols 1 through 13. That is, the value of the first field belongs to at least any one of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }.

Optionally, the first field is any one of a field, a message, information, and a cell in a radio resource control (reference signal received power, RRC) signaling message.

Alternatively, the ith symbol may be a first symbol, and the jth symbol may be a second symbol; or the ith symbol may be a first second symbol and the jth symbol may be a second symbol; or the ith symbol may be a first symbol and the jth symbol may be a first second symbol and a second symbol.

It should be understood that the first start field and the first field may be preconfigured or the network device may be preconfigured to the receiving terminal device.

In the embodiment of the present application, the receiving terminal device can determine, according to the first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining the time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field. Thereby enabling the receiving terminal device to receive the transmission side information on the second symbol,

with reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the determining a start symbol for transmitting the sidestream information includes: and determining the ith symbol as a starting symbol for transmitting the sidestream control information when the sidestream control information and/or the demodulation reference signal exist in a third time range behind the ith symbol.

Alternatively, the third time range may be understood as one or more symbols between the i-th symbol and the j-th symbol.

Alternatively, the third time range may be configured by the network device to the first terminal device, or may be preconfigured by the network device to the first terminal device.

Alternatively, the third time range may be determined by at least 2 of a start position, an end position, a duration of the first time range.

For example, the ith symbol is symbol 0, the jth symbol is symbol 7, and the third time range is symbol {1,2}. At this time, if the receiving terminal apparatus determines that there is sidestream control information on the symbols 1,2, it may be determined that the symbol 0 (i-th symbol) is the start symbol of transmission sidestream information.

For another example, the i-th symbol is symbol 0, the j-th symbol is symbol 7, and the third time range is {1,2,3}, at this time, if the receiving terminal device determines that the demodulation reference signal DMRS exists in the interval {1,2,3}, it can be determined that symbol 0 (i-th symbol) is the start symbol of the transmission side line information. Optionally, the DMRS includes PSCCH-DMRS and/or PSSCH-DMRS.

In this embodiment, the receiving terminal device determines that the sidelink control information exists in the third time range, and/or determines that the i-th symbol is the start symbol of the transmission sidelink information when the demodulation reference signal exists in the preset symbol position interval. In this way, the problem that the reception terminal apparatus cannot receive the transmission side line information of the j-th symbol due to AGC adjustment performed on the j-th symbol when the reception terminal apparatus does not know that the transmission side line information of the i-th symbol starts at the transmission terminal apparatus can be avoided.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

In the embodiment of the present application, the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is not mapped on the jth symbol, or the symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is mapped on the jth symbol, and the demodulation reference signal on the symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the jth symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the jth symbol is solved.

Optionally, the demodulation reference signal is a data demodulation reference signal (PSSCH DM-RS) and/or a control demodulation reference signal (PSCCH DM-RS).

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

When the receiving terminal device (also referred to as a first terminal device) performs AGC adjustment on the j-th symbol, it cannot receive DMRS on the symbol, which affects channel estimation, demodulation, and decoding.

It should be understood that the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol may be understood as: the j-th symbol is not overlapped with the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal or is not the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal.

Similarly, the symbol indicated by the j-th symbol being the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal can be understood as: the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes a j-th symbol, or the j-th symbol overlaps with the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the first terminal device receives an SCI from the second terminal device, the SCI indicating the first time domain pattern or the SCI indicating the second time domain pattern.

In the embodiment of the application, the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is not mapped on the j-th symbol, or the symbol indicated by the time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not comprise the j-th symbol, or the j+q-th symbol ₁ And j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is mapped on each symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the j-th symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol is solved.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is a symbol indicated by a second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is small in sizeAn integer equal to or greater than M.

Alternatively, the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal may also be referred to herein as a DMRS pattern, which may be indicated by SCI. For example, SCI indicates a first value, and the time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal is a first time domain pattern. For example, SCI indicates a second value, and the time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal is a second time domain pattern.

Optionally, the j symbol, j+q ₁ The symbol and j-q ₂ Each symbol is a symbol within the same slot.

Alternatively, q ₁ Or q ₂ The value of (2) may be any integer in {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14 }. For example q ₁ Or q ₂ ＝1。

Alternatively, q ₁ Or q ₂ Is preconfigured to the first terminal device, or q ₁ Or q ₂ Is configured by the network device to the first terminal device, or q ₁ Or q ₂ Is preset.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the jth+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the jth+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the first time domain pattern indicationDemodulation reference signal of j-th symbol, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the lateral information on the jth symbol is a copy of lateral information on the xth symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

Optionally, the x-th symbol is a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal may include at least one of: the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of a demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal mapped on the x-th symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of a demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal mapped on the x-th symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the x-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal; alternatively, the x-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal.

Optionally, the x-th symbol is not a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal may include at least one of: the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the xth symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal; alternatively, the j-th symbol is not a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the x-th symbol is not a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the xth symbol is the (j+q) th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

Wherein the x-th symbol, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ Each symbol may be located in the same slot.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

For example, the SCI of the second terminal apparatus indicates a first time domain pattern, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the first terminal apparatus determines a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal according to the second time domain pattern.

For example, the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal is {1,4,7,10}, and the j-th symbol is symbol 4, the receiving terminal device may demodulate the DMRS on the symbol {1,5,7,10} according to the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern and the position of the j-th symbol. At this time, q ₁ ＝1。

In the embodiment of the present application, although the symbols indicated by the DMRS time domain pattern include the jth symbol, the receiving terminal device may actually perform the processing in j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The DMRS are demodulated by each symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the jth symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol can be solved without changing the existing DMRS indication mechanism.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q-th according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating the demodulation reference signal on a symbol basis; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbolThe q is ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

For example, the SCI of the second terminal apparatus indicates a second time domain pattern, and the first terminal apparatus determines a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal according to the second time domain pattern, the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern not including the j-th symbol.

For example, the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal is {1,5,7,10}, the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern is {1,4,7,10}, and the j-th symbol is symbol 4, the receiving terminal device may demodulate the DMRS on symbol {1,5,7,10 }. Wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the j-th symbol.

Alternatively, the above procedure from the symbol {1,4,7,10} indicated by the first time domain pattern to the symbol {1,5,7,10} indicated by the second time domain pattern may be implemented by updating the DMRS pattern table.

In this embodiment of the present application, the receiving terminal device may demodulate the DMRS according to the updated indication of the DMRS pattern (i.e., the indication of the second time domain pattern), thereby solving the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the j-th symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: decoding the sideline data information carried on the symbol before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decoding the sideline data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol. The demodulation reference signal may be, for example, a demodulation reference signal of side line data.

The method may be further understood as decoding, in the first slot, side row data information carried on a symbol before the jth symbol according to a demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decoding, in the first slot, side row data information carried on a symbol after the jth symbol according to a demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol.

In the embodiment of the application, the decoding of the side data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol by using the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol and the decoding of the side data information carried on the symbol before the jth symbol by using the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol can be avoided, so that the side data information carried in the time slot can be ensured to be correctly decoded.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol includes: and decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the ith symbol and before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the ith symbol and before the jth symbol.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the decoding the side row data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol includes: decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol and before the mth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol and before the mth symbol; or decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol and before the M-1 symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol and before the M-1 symbol.

With reference to the first aspect, in certain implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: mapping the side line data information according to the symbol index and then according to the resource unit index; and/or mapping the side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

In this embodiment of the present application, by changing the mapping rule of the PSSCH and the CB concatenation rule, even if the sidestream information transmitted by a certain symbol in the first slot cannot be known, the receiving terminal device can infer sidestream information carried on the symbol according to the content of sidestream information transmitted on other symbols. In this way, correct transmission of sidestream information is facilitated.

In a second aspect, there is provided an information transmission method, the method comprising: determining N candidate starting symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, wherein M symbols are included in the first time slot, and the M symbols include N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information.

Optionally, the sidestream information does not include CPE. Optionally, the starting symbol of the side transmission does not include the CPE, or the starting symbol of the side transmission is the first symbol after the CPE, or the starting symbol of the side transmission is the last symbol of the symbols where the CPE is located.

Alternatively, the start symbol of the sidestream transmission may also be understood as the first symbol before the symbol that starts sidestream control information/sidestream data information resource allocation.

In this embodiment of the present invention, the transmitting terminal device may send the sidestream information in the first slot according to the time domain positions of the start symbols in the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, so that the receiving terminal device determines on which symbol to perform AGC adjustment according to the positions of the start symbols.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementation manners of the second aspect, the sidelink information carried on the jth symbol is determined to be sidelink control information and/or sidelink data information, where the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and j are integers less than M.

Optionally, the i-th symbol is a start symbol for transmitting the sidestream information, and the i-th symbol is a symbol for transmitting the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information.

Optionally, the i-th symbol is the first candidate start symbol for transmitting the sidestream information after the second terminal device LBT is successful.

In this embodiment of the present invention, when the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting the sidelink information from the ith symbol, the sidelink control information and/or the sidelink data information may be carried on the jth symbol.

With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, a position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

In the embodiment of the present application, the position of the jth symbol in the first slot is set to a fixed value, so that the transmitting terminal device can determine the position of the jth symbol in the first slot according to the fixed value.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

For example, when n=2, the candidate start symbol for transmitting the sideline information may be a first symbol and a second symbol, and when n=3, for example, the candidate start symbol for transmitting the sideline information may be a first symbol, a first second symbol, and a second symbol.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to a first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or configured by a network device to a second terminal device, the ith symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

Optionally, the first field is any one of a field, a message, information, and a cell in the RRC signaling message.

It should be understood that the first start field and the first field may be preconfigured or preconfigured by the network device to the transmitting terminal device.

In the embodiment of the application, the sending terminal device can determine the position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first starting field and the first field, so that the sending terminal device can transmit the sidestream information on the second symbol.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

In this embodiment of the present invention, by not mapping the symbol of the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol, or mapping the symbol of the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol, the demodulation reference signal on the symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol, which can avoid the situation that the transmitting terminal device cannot receive the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol when adjusting on the jth symbol.

Alternatively, the network apparatus may configure a plurality of time domain patterns, and the second terminal device may select the first time domain pattern and/or the second time domain pattern from the plurality of time domain patterns configured by the network apparatus.

Alternatively, the second terminal apparatus may transmit an SCI indicating the first time domain pattern or the SCI indicating the second time domain pattern to the first terminal apparatus.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second terminal device may determine the first time domain pattern or the second time domain pattern according to an indication of the SCI.

In the embodiment of the application, the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is not mapped on the j-th symbol, or the symbol indicated by the time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not comprise the j-th symbol, or the j+q-th symbol ₁ And j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is mapped on each symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the j-th symbol is solved.

With reference to the second aspect, inIn certain implementations of the second aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the jth+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

Alternatively, q ₁ Or q ₂ Is preconfigured to the second terminal device, or q ₁ Or q ₂ Is configured by the network device to the second terminal device, or q ₁ Or q ₂ Is preset.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol excluding the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the lateral information on the j-th symbol is a copy of the lateral information on the x-th symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the xth symbol is j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

For example, the second terminal apparatus selects the first time domain pattern, and the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the second terminal apparatus determines a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal according to the second time domain pattern. Wherein the second terminal device selects the first time domain pattern, it is also understood that the SCI sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device indicates the first time domain pattern. Wherein the second terminal device determines the symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal according to the second time domain pattern, and can be further understood as: the second terminal apparatus maps the demodulation reference signal on the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern.

The application is trueIn the embodiment, although the symbols indicated by the DMRS time domain pattern include the jth symbol, the transmitting terminal device may actually be at j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The number of symbols is mapped to the DMRS, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the jth symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol can be solved without changing the existing DMRS indication mechanism.

With reference to the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q-th according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

For example, the second terminal apparatus selects a second time domain pattern according to which the second terminal apparatus determines a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern not including the j-th symbol. Wherein the second terminal device selects the second time domain pattern, it is also understood that the SCI sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device indicates the second time domain pattern. Wherein the second terminal device determines the symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal according to the second time domain pattern, and can be further understood as: the second terminal apparatus maps the demodulation reference signal on the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern.

In this embodiment of the present application, the transmitting terminal device may map the DMRS according to the updated indication of the DMRS pattern (i.e., the indication of the second time domain pattern), so as to solve the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the j-th symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol.

With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the sideline data information is mapped according to a symbol index and then according to a resource unit index; and/or mapping the side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

In this embodiment of the present application, by changing the mapping rule of the PSSCH and the CB concatenation rule, even if the sidestream information transmitted by a certain symbol in the first slot cannot be known, the sending terminal device can infer sidestream information carried on the symbol according to the content of sidestream information transmitted on other symbols. In this way, correct transmission of sidestream information is facilitated.

In a third aspect, there is provided a method of information transmission, the method comprising: determining N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting side line information in a first time slot, wherein the first time slot comprises M symbols, the M symbols comprise N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is the initial symbol used for transmitting the side line information, the jth symbol is a symbol used for transmitting copy of the side line control information and/or copy of the side line data information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol, the i and j are integers smaller than M, and the N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting the side line information comprise the ith symbol and the jth symbol; and receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

The start symbol of the transmission side line information may be understood as the first symbol before the symbol for starting the transmission side line control information and/or the side line data information resource allocation.

Optionally, the start symbol of the transmission side line information does not include the CPE, or the start symbol of the transmission side line information is the first symbol after the CPE, or the start symbol of the transmission side line information is the last symbol of the symbols where the CPE is located.

Alternatively, the side-row information may include the copy information of the PSCCH and the PSSCH and at least one of the three channels PSCCH, PSCCH, PSFCH and DMRS, CSI-RS, PT-RS, side-row synchronization signals and S-SSB signals. Optionally, the side-row information does not include symbols for automatic gain control AGC.

Alternatively, the i-th symbol and the j-th symbol may be AGC symbols. Optionally, m=14, optionally, n=2 or 3.

Because the method of the first aspect, the receiving terminal device determines whether there is the sidelink control information or the demodulation reference signal in the first time range, the second time range or the third time range, and the processing time is required for the demodulation reference signal, some receiving terminal devices may process the data at a slower speed, and may not determine whether there is the sidelink control information or the demodulation reference signal after the ith symbol when the jth symbol occurs, so that the receiving terminal device cannot determine whether to decode according to the sidelink control information or the sidelink data information.

In this embodiment of the present invention, when the terminal device starts transmitting side information from the ith symbol, the data on the jth symbol is copied, instead of mapping data, on the jth symbol, so that the terminal device with a slower processing speed can quickly determine the side information transmitted on the jth symbol, and thus can correctly decode.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, a position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

The fixed value may be preset, and the fixed value may belong to any one of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13}, for example.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

With reference to the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to a first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

with reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol for copying transmission side line control information and/or copying side line data information, including: the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the first symbol after the jth symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the last symbol before the j-th symbol; or, the sidestream information of the jth symbol is a copy of the xth symbol carrying the sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the xth symbol of the sidestream data information, where x is any integer from 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of the sidestream data information.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the sidestream information on the jth symbol is a copy of sidestream control information and/or a copy of the sidestream data information, the copy of the information on the jth symbol may be the above-mentioned various cases, and in this manner, the content carried on the jth symbol is more flexible and various.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first terminal device receives an SCI from the second terminal device, the SCI indicating the first time domain pattern or the SCI indicating the second time domain pattern.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the j+q-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern Demodulation reference signal of number; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

Alternatively, q ₁ Or q ₂ The value of (2) may be any integer in {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14 }. For example q ₁ =1 or q ₂ ＝1。

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the jth symbolThe demodulation reference signal mapped on the number is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the lateral information on the jth symbol is a copy of lateral information on the xth symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the xth symbol is the (j+q) th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

With reference to the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q-th according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulation of the demodulation reference signal on a symbolA number; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: decoding the sideline data information carried on the symbol before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decoding the sideline data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol. The demodulation reference signal may be, for example, a demodulation reference signal of side line data.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol includes: and decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the ith symbol and before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the ith symbol and before the jth symbol.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol includes: decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol and before the mth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol and before the mth symbol; or decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the jth symbol and before the M-1 symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol and before the M-1 symbol.

With reference to the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: determining a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to a second field; the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured to a first terminal device by a network device, or indicated to the first terminal device by a second terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

Alternatively, the second field may be located in the sidestream control information (sidelink control information, SCI), the second field may be located in the first order sidestream control information, or the second field may be RRC or PC5-RRC signaling, where the PC5 interface is used for the SCCH control plane protocol stack of the RRC connection.

Alternatively, the second field may be used to indicate the number of symbols of the transmission side line information, or to indicate the start symbol of the transmission side line information.

It will be appreciated that the second field may be pre-configured, or indicated by the network device, or pre-configured by the network device to the receiving terminal device, or indicated by the transmitting terminal device to the receiving terminal device. Wherein the second field is indicated by the network device may include: the network device indicates the second field through RRC; the second field is a network device preconfigured to the terminal device may include: the RRC sent by the network device pre-configures a second field; the second field is an indication of the transmitting terminal device to the receiving terminal device may include: the transmitting terminal apparatus indicates the second field in the sidestream information.

In this embodiment of the present application, the receiving terminal device may determine, according to the second field, the number of symbols of the transmission side line control information and/or the side line data information in the first slot, so as to calculate the transport block size.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sideline information, including: the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after a first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after the first second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a third value.

Optionally, the copied symbol does not belong to the symbol from which the side row control information and/or side row data information was transmitted.

In this embodiment of the present invention, the receiving terminal device determines the first value, the second value, or the third value of the second field by determining from which symbol to start transmitting the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information, so that the terminal device can determine the number of symbols transmitting the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information in the first time slot.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, and the determining, according to the second field, the first number of symbols in the first slot includes:

the value of the second field is the first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-2，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-2，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-2, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-1；Len ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-1，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) of the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field,S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the SCI in the sidestream information includes the second field and the first slot includes a first symbol and a second symbol, the terminal device may determine the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information in the first slot according to the value of the second field.

With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, and the determining, according to the second field, the first number of symbols in the first slot includes:

the value of the second field is the first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-3，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-3，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-3, len is the value indicated by the first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

The value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-2，Len ₂ A value indicated for a second length field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-2，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len (Len)–S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

The value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₃ -X-1，Len ₃ For a third length field (or, a second, first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₂ ’-X-1，Len ₂ ' is a second length field (or a second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₃ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ For the value indicated by the third start field (or, the second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field (or the second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₃ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₃ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-S ₂ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ ' is the spacing of the first symbol from the second, second symbol.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the SCI in the sidestream information includes a second field and the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the terminal device may determine the number of symbols for transmitting sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information in the first slot according to the value of the second field.

The value of the second field is the first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-2，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols;Len ₀ ’-X-2，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-2, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

Optionally, the first number of symbols is a number of symbols that may be used for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream control information. Among other things, transmission can also be understood as resource allocation (resource allocation), mapping (mapping), multiplexing (multiplexing). The above concepts are generally indistinguishable.

Optionally, when differentiation of resource allocation, mapping is required. The symbols allocated to the PSCCH and/or pscsch do not include duplicate symbols. The symbols mapped to the PSCCH and/or PSSCH include duplicate symbols of the PSCCH and/or PSSCH.

Optionally, the first number of symbols comprises a number of symbols that may be used for transmission side row feedback information PSFCH. Optionally, the first terminal device determines the number of symbols used for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream control information according to a difference between the first number of symbols and the number of symbols used for transmitting the sidestream feedback information PSFCH when calculating the TBS.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the second field is RRC or PC5-RRC signaling and the first slot includes a first symbol and a second symbol, the terminal device may determine the number of symbols for transmitting the sidelink control information and/or the sidelink data information in the first slot according to the value of the second field. In addition, when the second field uses SCI indication, a corresponding bit value needs to be increased, thereby increasing dynamic overhead of sidestream information transmission. While using RRC or PC5-RRC to indicate the second field may reduce the corresponding dynamic overhead.

the value of the second field is the first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-3，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-3，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-3, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For values indicated by the second length field (or, alternatively, the first and second length fields), X is the number of GAP symbols, 0.5X (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is the value indicated by the first and second length fields, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ The value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ The value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +5) -X, len is the value S indicated by the first Length field ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the first second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbol (or the first and first fields), and X is the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₃ )–X-2，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₃ A value indicated for the third length field (or, a second first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₂ ’)–X-2，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₂ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or a second first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₃ ) -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ For the value indicated by the three start field (or, the second, first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ ') -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₃ ) -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-0.5 x (S ₂ ') -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol (or the second first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the second field is RRC or PC5-RRC signaling and the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the terminal device may determine the number of symbols for transmitting the sidelink control information and/or the sidelink data information in the first slot according to the value of the second field. In addition, when the second field uses SCI indication, a corresponding bit value needs to be increased, thereby increasing dynamic overhead of sidestream information transmission. While using RRC or PC5-RRC to indicate the second field may reduce the corresponding dynamic overhead.

In a fourth aspect, there is provided an information transmission method, the method including: determining N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting side line information in a first time slot, wherein the first time slot comprises M symbols, the M symbols comprise N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is the initial symbol used for transmitting the side line information, the jth symbol is a symbol used for transmitting copy of the side line control information and/or copy of the side line data information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol, the i and j are integers smaller than M, and the N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting the side line information comprise the ith symbol and the jth symbol; and transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

In this embodiment of the present invention, when the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting side information from the ith symbol, the data on the jth symbol is copied, instead of mapping data, on the jth symbol, and by this way, the receiving terminal device with a slower processing speed can quickly determine the side information transmitted on the jth symbol, so that decoding can be performed correctly.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, a position of the j-th symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to a first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

In this embodiment of the present application, the transmitting terminal device may determine, according to the first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field, so that the receiving terminal device can receive the transmission sidestream information on the second symbol.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the j symbols are symbols for transmission side row control information and/or side row data information, including: the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the first symbol after the jth symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the last symbol before the j-th symbol; or, the sidestream information of the jth symbol is a copy of the xth symbol carrying the sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the xth symbol of the sidestream data information, where x is any integer from 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of the sidestream data information.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is less than or equal to MA positive integer.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the j+q-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

Alternatively, q1 or q2 is preconfigured to the second terminal device, or q1 or q2 is network device configured to the second terminal device, or q1 or q2 is preconfigured.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals mapped on the symbols are the first time domain patternAnd the indicated demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the lateral information on the j-th symbol is a copy of the lateral information on the x-th symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the xth symbol is the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourth aspect, the partyThe method further comprises the steps of: at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

In this embodiment of the present application, although the symbols indicated by the DMRS time domain pattern include the jth symbol, the transmitting terminal device may actually be located at j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The number of symbols is mapped to the DMRS, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the jth symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol can be solved without changing the existing DMRS indication mechanism.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: at the j+q-th according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: determining a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to a second field; the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured by a network device to a second terminal device, or indicated by the second terminal device to a first terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

Alternatively, the second field may be located in the SCI, the second field may be located in the first order sidelink control information, or the second field may be RRC or PC5-RRC signaling, where the PC5 interface is used for the SCCH control plane protocol stack of the RRC connection.

In this embodiment of the present application, the transmitting terminal device may determine, according to the second field, the number of symbols of the transmission side row control information and/or the side row data information in the first slot, so as to calculate the transport block size.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, including: the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after the first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after a first second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a third value.

Optionally, the copied symbol does not belong to a symbol from which transmission of the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information is started.

In this embodiment of the present invention, the transmitting terminal device determines the first value, the second value, or the third value of the second field by determining from which symbol to start transmitting the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information, so that the transmitting terminal device can determine the number of symbols transmitting the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information in the first time slot.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the first slot includes one of the first symbols and one of the second symbols, and the determining, according to the second field, the number of first symbols in the first slot includes:

the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is the following At least one item of content: len (Len) ₂ -X-1；Len ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-1，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) of the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, one of the first symbols and two of the second symbols are included in the first slot, and the determining, according to the second field, the number of first symbols in the first slot includes:

The value of the second field is theA second value, the first number of symbols being at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-2，Len ₂ A value indicated for a second length field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-2，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

The value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₃ -X-1，Len ₃ For a third length field (or, a second, first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₂ ’-X-1，Len ₂ ' is a second length field (or a second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₃ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ For the value indicated by the third start field (or, the second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field (or the second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₃ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₃ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol;Len–S ₂ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ ' is the spacing of the first symbol from the second, second symbol.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the SCI in the sidestream information includes a second field and the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the sending terminal device may determine, according to a value of the second field, the number of symbols for transmitting sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information in the first slot.

the value of the second field is the first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-2，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-2，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-2, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field),x is GAP symbol number; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

Optionally, the first number of symbols is a number of symbols that may be used for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream control information. Among other things, transmission can also be understood as resource allocation (resource allocation), mapping (mapping), multiplexing (multiplexing).

In this embodiment of the present application, when the second field is RRC or PC5-RRC signaling and the first slot includes a first symbol and a second symbol, the sending terminal device may determine the number of symbols for transmitting the sidelink control information and/or the sidelink data information in the first slot according to the value of the second field. In addition, when the second field uses SCI indication, a corresponding bit value needs to be increased, thereby increasing dynamic overhead of sidestream information transmission. While using RRC or PC5-RRC to indicate the second field may reduce the corresponding dynamic overhead.

the value of the second field is the first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-3，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-3，Len ₀ ' is the value indicated by the first length field, X is GANumber of P symbols; len-X-3, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₃ )–X-2，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₃ A value indicated for the third length field (or, a second first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₂ ’)–X-2，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₂ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or a second first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₃ ) -X-2, len is the first lengthThe value indicated by the degree field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ For the value indicated by the three start field (or, the second, first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ ') -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₃ ) -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-0.5 x (S ₂ ') -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol (or the second first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the second field is RRC or PC5-RRC signaling and the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the sending terminal device may determine the number of symbols for transmitting the sidelink control information and/or the sidelink data information in the first slot according to the value of the second field. In addition, when the second field uses SCI indication, a corresponding bit value needs to be increased, thereby increasing dynamic overhead of sidestream information transmission. While using RRC or PC5-RRC to indicate the second field may reduce the corresponding dynamic overhead.

In a fifth aspect, there is provided an information transmission method, the method comprising at least one of:

with reference to the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the method further includes: the network device configures N candidate start symbols for transmission of sidestream information.

Optionally, the method for configuring N candidate start symbols for transmitting sidestream information by the network device includes: by configuring at least any one of the first start field, the first length field, the first field and/or the second length field.

With reference to the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the method further includes: the network device configuration configures at least any one of the first time range, the second time range, and/or the third time range.

Optionally, the method for configuring the first time range includes: indicating at least 2 of a start position, an end position and/or a duration of the first time range.

Optionally, the method for configuring the second time range includes: indicating at least 2 of a start position, an end position and/or a duration of the first time range.

Optionally, the method for configuring the third time range includes: indicating at least 2 of a start position, an end position and/or a duration of the first time range.

With reference to the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the method further includes: the configuration uses the method of any one of the first to fourth aspects.

With reference to the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the method further includes: configuration X is the number X of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a sixth aspect, there is provided an information transmission method, the method including: receiving COT sharing information of channel occupation time, wherein the COT sharing information indicates that a first COT is used for transmitting sidestream information of a second terminal device, and the first COT is the COT of the second terminal device or a third terminal device; receiving second sidestream control information SCI sent by a second terminal device, wherein the second SCI indicates second resources, the second resources are overlapped with first resources, and the first resources determine resources for sidestream information transmission for the first terminal device; and determining that the sidestream information is not transmitted on the first resource according to the COT sharing information and the second SCI.

The first COT can also be understood as the time when the third terminal device can continuously transmit the sidestream information after the listen-before-talk (listen before talk, LBT) is successful.

The first resource determines a resource for transmitting side traffic information for the first terminal device, which is understood to be that the resource for transmitting is not necessarily actually used, and whether the first terminal device uses the first resource to transmit the side traffic information is determined according to other conditions, for example, whether the first terminal device performs preemption check or re-evaluation is determined.

Alternatively, the second terminal device and the third terminal device may be the same terminal device. That is, the COT instruction information of the third terminal apparatus instructs itself to transmit own sidestream information within the first COT.

Optionally, the overlapping of the second resource with the first resource includes at least any one of: the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in time domain; or the first resource and the second resource overlap or partially overlap in frequency domain; or the frequency domain of the RB set where the first resource and the second resource are located overlaps or partially overlaps; or the first resource and the first COT frequency domain where the second resource is located overlap or partially overlap; or the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the first COT time domain where the second resource is located.

Wherein the above overlapping methods may be combined in at least any one of the above. For example, the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the time domain, and the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the frequency domain. For another example, the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the time domain, and the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the RB set in which the second resource is located in the frequency domain. For another example, the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the time domain, and the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the first COT frequency domain where the second resource is located.

In the embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may determine, according to the COT shared information and the indication of the second SCI, that the sidestream information is not transmitted on the first resource, so that resource collision between the terminal devices may be avoided, and unnecessary resource reselection may be avoided.

With reference to the sixth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixth aspect, the COT sharing information does not indicate that the first terminal device shares a first COT.

With reference to the sixth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixth aspect, the determining that sidestream information is not transmitted on the first resource according to the COT shared information and the second SCI includes: determining that the first terminal device is not transmitting information on the first resource if the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

It should be appreciated that the priority values have a correspondence to priority levels, and that lower priority values may represent higher levels of priority, e.g., a first priority value is less than a second priority value, and the first priority level is higher than the second priority level. I.e. the first terminal device reserves or uses the first resources for transmission of sidestream information.

In the embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device determines that the second terminal device can share the first COT, and the first terminal device does not transmit on the first resource even if the priority value indicated by the first terminal device SCI is small.

With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, that side row information is not transmitted on the first resource includes: and determining that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource in the case that the demodulation reference signal measurement value of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

Wherein the demodulation reference signal measurement value of the second resource is less than or equal to the third threshold value may be understood that the first terminal device may use the first resource for transmission.

In this embodiment, the first terminal device determines that the second terminal device can share the first COT, and the first terminal device does not transmit on the first resource even if the measured value of the demodulation reference signal indicated by the first terminal device SCI is small.

With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the determining, by the first resource, a resource for sidestream information transmission for the first terminal device includes: the first resource is a resource indicated by a first SCI of the first terminal device, and/or the first resource is a resource selected by the first terminal device for transmitting the sidestream information.

With reference to the sixth aspect, in some implementations of the sixth aspect, the COT sharing information is not earlier than a first time in a time domain, where the first time is a first time slot where the first resource is located, minus a first duration, and/or the COT sharing information is not later than a second time in a time domain, where the second time is a first time slot where the first resource is located, minus a second duration.

In the embodiment of the invention, the validity of COT shared information transmission is ensured by setting the COT shared information to be transmitted not earlier than the first time or not later than the second time in the time domain, so that the terminal device can process the COT shared information in the corresponding time.

With reference to the sixth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixth aspect, the time-frequency resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT and/or the time-frequency resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT.

Optionally, the time-frequency resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT, and the time-domain resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT, and/or the frequency-domain resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT.

Optionally, the time-frequency resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT, and/or the time-domain resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT.

In a seventh aspect, there is provided a method of information transmission, the method comprising: transmitting second sidestream control information SCI, wherein the second SCI indicates second resources, the second resources are overlapped with first resources, the first resources are used for sidestream information transmission by a first terminal device, and receiving COT sharing information; transmitting sidestream information on a first COT according to the COT sharing information, wherein the first COT is the COT of a second terminal device or a third terminal device; and determining to transmit side line information on the second resource according to the COT sharing information.

In the embodiment of the present application, the second terminal device may determine, according to the received COT sharing information, to transmit information on the second resource, so as to avoid resource collision with the first terminal device, and avoid unnecessary resource reselection.

With reference to the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the COT sharing information does not indicate that the first terminal device shares a first COT.

With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, transmission side line information on the second resource includes: determining that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource when the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold value, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold value; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the second terminal device is capable of transmitting the sidestream information on the first COT, the second terminal device is capable of transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource even if the priority value of the second terminal device is large.

With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, transmission side line information on the second resource includes: and determining that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource under the condition that the measured value of the demodulation reference signal of the second resource is smaller than or equal to a third threshold value.

In this embodiment, when the second terminal device is able to transmit the side line information on the first COT, the second terminal device is able to transmit the information on the second resource even if the measured value of the demodulation reference information number indicated by the second terminal device SCI is small.

With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the second terminal device sends sidestream information to a third terminal device on the second resource.

With reference to the seventh aspect, in some implementations of the seventh aspect, the COT sharing information is not earlier than a first time in a time domain, where the first time is a first time slot where the first resource is located, minus a first duration, and/or the COT sharing information is not later than a second time in a time domain, where the second time is a first time slot where the first resource is located, minus a second duration.

With reference to the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the time-frequency resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT and/or the time-frequency resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT.

In an eighth aspect, there is provided a method of information transmission, the method comprising: receiving COT sharing information, wherein the COT sharing information indicates that a first COT is used for transmitting side line information of a second terminal device, the first COT is COT of the second terminal device or a third terminal device, the second resource is overlapped with a first resource, and the first resource is a resource which can be used for side line transmission by the first terminal device; and determining whether to transmit side line information on the first resource according to the COT sharing information.

With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the second resource is a resource indicated by a second SCI of the second terminal device, and it is determined whether to transmit sidestream information on the first resource according to the COT shared information and the second SCI.

With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the first resource is a resource that the first terminal device may use for transmission includes: the first resource is a resource indicated by a first SCI of the first terminal device.

With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, that side row information is not transmitted on the first resource includes: determining that the first terminal device is not transmitting information on the first resource if the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, that side row information is not transmitted on the first resource includes: and determining that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource in the case that the demodulation reference signal measurement value of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

With reference to the eighth aspect, in some implementations of the eighth aspect, the COT sharing information is not earlier in time domain than a first time, where the first time is a first time slot where the first resource is located, minus a first duration, and/or the COT sharing information is not later in time domain than a second time, where the second time is a first time slot where the first resource is located, minus a second duration.

With reference to the eighth aspect, in certain implementations of the eighth aspect, a time-frequency resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT, and/or a time-frequency resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT.

In a ninth aspect, there is provided a method of information transmission, the method comprising: transmitting COT sharing information, wherein the COT sharing information indicates that a first COT is used for transmitting side line information of a second terminal device, the first COT is COT of the second terminal device or a third terminal device, the second resource is overlapped with the first resource, and the second resource is a resource which can be used for side line transmission by the second terminal device; and determining whether to transmit side line information on the second resource according to the COT sharing information.

With reference to the ninth aspect, in some implementations of the ninth aspect, the second resource is a resource indicated by a second SCI of the second terminal device, and it is determined whether to transmit sidestream information on the first resource according to the COT shared information and the second SCI.

With reference to the ninth aspect, in certain implementations of the ninth aspect, the first resource is a resource indicated by a first SCI of the first terminal device.

With reference to the ninth aspect, in some implementations of the ninth aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, transmission side line information on the second resource includes: determining that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource when the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold value, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold value; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

With reference to the ninth aspect, in some implementations of the ninth aspect, the determining, according to the COT shared information, transmission side line information on the second resource includes: and determining that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource under the condition that the measured value of the demodulation reference signal of the second resource is smaller than or equal to a third threshold value.

In a tenth aspect, there is provided a method of information transmission, the method comprising: the third terminal device transmits COT sharing information indicating that the second terminal device transmits on a second resource within a first COT, which is the COT of the second terminal device or the third terminal device.

Optionally, the third terminal device receives sidestream information on the second resource.

An eleventh aspect provides an information transmission apparatus, the apparatus comprising: a processing unit, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, where the first time slot includes M symbols, and the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementation manners of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to perform automatic gain control AGC on an i-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, where i is an integer less than M, and there is no sidelink control information and/or demodulation reference signal in a first time range before the i-th symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementation manners of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to not perform AGC on a jth symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information, where the jth symbol is located after an ith symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information, and the ith and j are integers less than M, where sideline control information and/or demodulation reference signals are detected in a second time range after the ith symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementation manners of the eleventh aspect, the starting symbol is an ith symbol, and the processing unit is further configured to determine that the sidelink information carried on the jth symbol is sidelink control information and/or sidelink data information, where the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, and the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and j are integers less than M.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in some implementations of the eleventh aspect, a position of the j-th symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine, according to a first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in some implementations of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the ith symbol is a starting symbol for transmitting the sidelink information when the sidelink control information and/or the demodulation reference signal exist in a third time range after the ith symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The individual symbols map the solutionModulating the sign of the reference signal, wherein q ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the transceiver unit is configured to receive an SCI from the second terminal device, where the SCI indicates the first time domain pattern, or where the SCI indicates the second time domain pattern.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbolThe demodulation reference signal mapped on is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in some implementations of the eleventh aspect, the side row information on the j-th symbol is a copy of the side row information on the x-th symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the x-th symbol is j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementation manners of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, according to a symbol indicated by a second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, perform a processing in the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating the demodulation reference signal on a symbol basis; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is smaller than or equal to An integer equal to M.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in certain implementations of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to decode the sideline data information carried on a symbol before the jth symbol according to a demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decode the sideline data information carried on a symbol after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol.

With reference to the eleventh aspect, in some implementations of the eleventh aspect, the processing unit is further configured to map the sideline data information according to a symbol index and then according to a resource unit index; and/or mapping the side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

In a twelfth aspect, there is provided an information transmission apparatus, the apparatus comprising: a processing unit, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, where the first time slot includes M symbols, and the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is the starting symbol for transmitting the sidestream information.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the start symbol is an ith symbol, and the processing unit is further configured to determine that the sidelink information carried on the jth symbol is sidelink control information and/or sidelink data information, where the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and j are integers less than M.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, a position of the j-th symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in certain implementations of the twelfth aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine, according to a first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or configured by a network device to a second terminal device, the ith symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in certain implementations of the twelfth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

Combined with the tenthIn some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping of symbolsThe transmitted demodulation reference signal is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the lateral information on the j-th symbol is a copy of the lateral information on the x-th symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the x-th symbol is j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q, according to a symbol indicated by a second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the twelfth aspect, in some implementations of the twelfth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to map the sideline data information according to a symbol index and then according to a resource unit index; and/or mapping the side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

In a thirteenth aspect, there is provided an information transmission apparatus, the apparatus comprising: a processing unit, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting side line information in a first slot, where the first slot includes M symbols, where the M symbols include N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is a start symbol for transmitting the side line information, an jth symbol is a symbol for transmitting copy of side line control information and/or copy of side line data information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol, the i and j are integers less than M, and the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information include the ith symbol and the jth symbol; and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, a position of the j-th symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot according to a first start field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementation manners of the thirteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol for copying transmission side line control information and/or copying side line data information, including: the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the first symbol after the jth symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the last symbol before the j-th symbol; or, the sidestream information of the jth symbol is a copy of the xth symbol carrying the sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the xth symbol of the sidestream data information, where x is any integer from 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of the sidestream data information.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the j-th symbol, or the j-th symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the j-th symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the j-th symbol.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the transceiver unit is configured to receive an SCI from the second terminal device, where the SCI indicates the first time domain pattern, or where the SCI indicates the second time domain pattern.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementation manners of the thirteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the j+q-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include demodulation parametersA test signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the lateral information on the j-th symbol is a copy of the lateral information on the x-th symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the x-th symbol is j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementation manners of the thirteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, in the j+q-th aspect ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in certain implementation manners of the thirteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, according to a symbol indicated by a second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, perform a processing in the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating the demodulation reference signal on a symbol basis; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine, according to a second field, a first number of symbols in the first slot; the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured to a first terminal device by a network device, or indicated to the first terminal device by a second terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, including: the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after a first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after the first second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a third value.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have the first value, and the first symbol number is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-1、Len ₁ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-1、Len-S ₂ -X-1、Len–S ₁ Any one of the following items' -X-1, wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have a value of the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-2、Len ₁ ’-X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-2、Len-S ₂ -X-2、Len–S ₁ Any one of' -X-2; the value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₃ -X-1、Len ₂ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₃ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ ’-X-1、Len-S ₃ -X-1、Len–S ₂ Any one of' -X-1; wherein Len, len0', len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ Value indicated for the second length field, len ₃ Value indicated for the third length field, len ₁ ' value indicated for first and second Length field, len ₂ ' value indicated for second length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval between said first symbol and a first of said second symbols, S ₃ A value indicated for a third start field or a symbol interval between the first symbol and a second of the second symbols, S ₁ ' the value indicated by the first and second start fields or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbols, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the first slot includes one of the first symbols and one of the second symbols, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field with the first value as the value of the first symbol, where the first symbol numberIs Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any one of' +3) -X; wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

With reference to the thirteenth aspect, in some implementations of the thirteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have a value of the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any of' +5) -X;

the second field has the third value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₃ )–X-2、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₂ ’)–X-2、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₃ )–X-2、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ ’)-X-2、Len-0.5*S ₃ -X-2、Len-0.5*S ₂ Any one of' -X-2; wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ Value indicated for the second length field, len ₃ Value indicated for the third length field, len ₁ ' value indicated for first and second Length field, len ₂ ' value indicated for second length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval between said first symbol and a first of said second symbols, S ₃ A value indicated for a third start field or a symbol interval between the first symbol and a second of the second symbols, S ₁ ' the value indicated by the first and second start fields or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbols, S ₂ ' is the second initial field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a fourteenth aspect, there is provided an information transmission apparatus, the apparatus comprising: a processing unit, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting side line information in a first slot, where the first slot includes M symbols, where the M symbols include N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is a start symbol for transmitting the side line information, an jth symbol is a symbol for transmitting copy of side line control information and/or copy of side line data information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol, the i and j are integers less than M, and the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information include the ith symbol and the jth symbol; and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, a position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side row information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot according to a first start field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol for copying transmission side line control information and/or copying side line data information, including: the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the first symbol after the jth symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the last symbol before the j-th symbol; or, the sidestream information of the jth symbol is a copy of the xth symbol carrying the sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the xth symbol of the sidestream data information, where x is any integer from 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of the sidestream data information.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, with reference to the eleventh aspect, in some implementations of the eleventh aspect, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the j-th symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the side row information on the j-th symbol is a copy of the side row information on the x-th symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the x-th symbol is j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in a certain of the fourteenth aspectIn some implementations, the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q, based on the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to a second field; the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured to a first terminal device by a network device, or indicated to the first terminal device by a second terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, including: the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after a first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after the first second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a third value.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have a value of the first value, where the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-1、Len ₁ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-1、Len-S ₂ -X-1、Len–S ₁ Any one of the following items' -X-1, wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have a value of the first value, where the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-2、Len ₁ ’-X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-2、Len-S ₂ -X-2、Len–S ₁ Any one of' -X-2; the value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₃ -X-1、Len ₂ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₃ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ ’-X-1、Len-S ₃ -X-1、Len–S ₂ Any one of' -X-1; wherein Len, len0', len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ Value indicated for the second length field, len ₃ Value indicated for the third length field, len ₁ ' value indicated for first and second Length field, len ₂ ' value indicated for second length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval between said first symbol and a first of said second symbols, S ₃ Is the third initial wordThe value of the segment indication or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' the value indicated by the first and second start fields or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbols, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have a value of the first value, where the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any one of' +3) -X; wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

With reference to the fourteenth aspect, in some implementations of the fourteenth aspect, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, and the processing unit is specifically configured to use the second field to have a value of the first value, where the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any of' +5) -X;

In a fifteenth aspect, there is provided an information transmission apparatus comprising: a transceiver unit, configured to receive channel occupation time COT sharing information, where the COT sharing information indicates that a first COT is used for transmission side information of a second terminal device, and the first COT is a COT of the second terminal device or a third terminal device; the receiving and transmitting unit is further configured to receive second sidestream control information SCI sent by a second terminal device, where the second SCI indicates a second resource, the second resource overlaps with a first resource, and the first resource determines a resource for sidestream information transmission for the first terminal device; and a processing unit, configured to determine that sidestream information is not transmitted on the first resource according to the COT sharing information and the second SCI.

In a fifteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifteenth aspect, the COT sharing information does not indicate that the first terminal device shares a first COT.

A fifteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifteenth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource if the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to a first threshold, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In a fifteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifteenth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource if a demodulation reference signal measurement value of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

In a fifteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifteenth aspect, the determining, by the first resource, a resource for sidestream information transmission for the first terminal device includes: the first resource is a resource indicated by a first SCI of the first terminal device, and/or the first resource is a resource selected by the first terminal device for transmitting the sidestream information.

In a fifteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifteenth aspect, the COT shared information is not earlier in time domain than a first time, the first time being a first time slot in which the first resource is located minus a first duration, and/or the COT shared information is not later in time domain than a second time, the second time being a first time slot in which the first resource is located minus a second duration.

In a fifteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifteenth aspect, the time-frequency resources of the first resource belong to the first COT and/or the time-frequency resources of the second resource belong to the first COT.

In a sixteenth aspect, there is provided an information transmission apparatus comprising: a transceiver unit, configured to send second sidestream control information SCI, where the second SCI indicates a second resource, where the second resource overlaps with a first resource, where the first resource is a resource used by a first terminal device for sidestream information transmission, and the transceiver unit is further configured to receive channel occupation time COT sharing information; transmitting sidestream information on a first COT according to the COT sharing information, wherein the first COT is the COT of a second terminal device or a third terminal device; and the processing unit is used for determining transmission side line information on the second resource according to the COT sharing information.

In a sixteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixteenth aspect, the COT sharing information does not indicate that the first terminal device shares a first COT.

In a sixteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixteenth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource if the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold value, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold value; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In a sixteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixteenth aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource if the demodulation reference signal measurement value of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

In a sixteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixteenth aspect, the COT shared information is not earlier in time domain than a first time, the first time being the first time slot in which the first resource is located minus a first duration, and/or the COT shared information is not later in time domain than a second time, the second time being the first time slot in which the first resource is located minus a second duration.

In a sixteenth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixteenth aspect, the time-frequency resources of the first resource belong to the first COT and/or the time-frequency resources of the second resource belong to the first COT.

A seventeenth aspect provides an information transmission apparatus, comprising: at least one processor coupled to the memory for reading and executing instructions in the memory, and a memory for performing the methods of the various aspects described above.

In an eighteenth aspect, there is provided a computer readable medium storing program code which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of the above aspects.

In a nineteenth aspect, there is provided a chip comprising: at least one processor coupled to the memory for reading and executing instructions in the memory, and a memory for performing the methods of the various aspects described above.

Drawings

Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of whether there is a PSFCH opportunity in a slot provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of a time domain position of an NR-PSCCH-DMRS according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of a frequency domain location of an NR-PSCCH-DMRS provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 4 is a schematic illustration of interleaving provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of semi-static channel access provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of retransmission reserved resources and periodic reserved resources in NR according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of a sixth symbol transmission information of a terminal device in a first slot according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application having 2 AGC symbols in a slot.

Fig. 9 is an application scenario diagram to which the method for information transmission provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable.

Fig. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 11 is a schematic flow chart of another method for information transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 12 is a schematic flow chart of another method for information transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 13 is a schematic flow chart of another method for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the number and location of preconfigured AGC symbols provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 15 is a method for determining the content of the second AGC symbol according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 16 is a diagram of another method for determining the content of a second AGC symbol according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 17 is a further method for determining the content of the second AGC symbol according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 18 is a method for changing a PSSCH mapping rule according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 19 is a method for changing a PSSCH mapping CB concatenation rule according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 20 is a method for determining a first number of symbols in a time slot according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 21 is a symbol method for mapping DMRS according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 22 is a symbol method for decoding DMRS according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of overlapping first resources and second resources in a preemption procedure provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 24 is a schematic diagram of sharing resources of a slot m to a terminal device 2 by the COT indication information provided in the embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 25 is a schematic diagram of overlapping first resources and second resources in a re-evaluation process according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of sharing resources of a slot m to a terminal device 2 by another COT indication information provided in the embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 27 is a schematic flowchart of another method for information transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 28 is a schematic flow chart of another method for information transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 29 is a device for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.

Fig. 30 is a schematic diagram of another apparatus for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.

Detailed Description

The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.

The technical solution of the embodiment of the application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: global system for mobile communications (Global System of Mobile communication, GSM), code division multiple access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) systems, general packet Radio service (General Packet Radio Service, GPRS), long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) systems, LTE frequency division duplex (Frequency Division Duplex, FDD) systems, LTE time division duplex (Time Division Duplex, TDD), universal mobile telecommunications system (Universal Mobile Telecommunication System, UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access, wiMAX) communication systems, future fifth generation (5th Generation,5G) systems or New Radio, NR) systems, and the like.

The terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a user equipment, an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent, or a user device. The terminal device may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (Session Initiation Protocol, SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication functionality, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a car-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a future 5G network or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc., as the embodiments of the application are not limited in this respect.

The network device in the embodiment of the present application may be an apparatus for communicating with a terminal device, which may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in a global system for mobile communications (Global System of Mobile communication, GSM) or code division multiple access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA), a base station (NodeB, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) system, an evolved base station (eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system, a wireless controller in a cloud wireless access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN) scenario, or a network device in a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a future 5G network, or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network, or the like, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited.

The network element according to the embodiment of the present application includes at least any one of a user equipment, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR)/Virtual Reality (VR)/augmented reality (XR) device, a wearable device, an intelligent home appliance terminal, a terminal device, a communication module of the terminal device, a mobile phone, a communication module of the vehicle, an information processing device, a display device, a network device, a base station, a TRP, a user front end device (customer premise equipment, CPE), a router, a network access device, and the like. Considering Uu (UTRAN-to-terminal device) air interface transmission, both parties of wireless communication include a network device and a user communication equipment; considering SL air interface transmission, both the transceiver end of the wireless communication are user communication devices. In the system architecture diagram, the network device may be a legacy macro base station eNB in a legacy UMTS/LTE wireless communication system, a micro base station eNB in a heterogeneous network (heterogeneous network, hetNet) scenario, a baseband processing unit (BBU) and a remote radio unit (remote radio unit, RRU) in a distributed base station scenario, a baseband pool BBU pool and a radio unit RRU in a CRAN scenario, and a gNB in a future wireless communication system. The user communication device can be a vehicle-mounted communication module or other embedded communication modules, and also can be a user handheld communication device, including a mobile phone, a tablet computer and the like.

In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, first, concepts and technologies related to the embodiments of the application will be briefly described.

The resource:

specifically, time-frequency resources. According to the standard Rel-16/Rel-17 NR protocol, the scheduling granularity of a physical sidelink control channel PSCCH (physical sidelink control channel, PSCCH) or a physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink shared channel, PSSCH) is in time domain in one slot and in frequency domain in consecutive one or more sub-channels. The transmitting terminal apparatus may transmit sidelink information on the resource, and may carry signals such as PSCCH, PSSCH, physical sidelink feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH), demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DM-RS), and channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS) on one resource. The PSCCH carries first order sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI), the PSSCH carries second order SCI and/or data, and the PSFCH carries feedback information. Wherein the PSCCH/PSSCH comprises a PSCCH and/or a PSSCH.

Time unit, frequency domain unit:

the time domain resources include symbols (symbols), slots (slots), mini slots (mini-slots), partial slots (partial slots), subframes (sub-frames), radio frames (frames), sensing slots (sensing slots), and the like.

The frequency domain resources include Resource Elements (REs), resource Blocks (RBs), RB sets (RBs sets), subchannels (sub-channels), resource pools (resource pools), bandwidth parts (BWP), carriers (carriers), channels (interlaces), and the like.

For ease of description, the resources for transmitting the PSCCH/PSSCH are described herein with time domain resources as slots, frequency domain resources as subchannels, or interlaces.

Physical sidelink control channel:

the PSCCH carries a first order SCI. For ease of description, PSCCH and SCI are meant to be the same unless otherwise indicated. In the time domain, the PSCCH occupies two or three Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols starting from the second sideline symbol; in the frequency domain, the physical resource blocks (physical resource blocks, PRBs) carrying the PSCCHs start from the lowest PRB of the lowest subchannel of the associated PSCCHs, and the number of PRBs occupied by the PSCCHs is within the subband range of one pscsch. The PSCCH consists of {10,12,15,20,25} Resource Blocks (RBs), with specific values indicated by radio resource control (reference signal received power, RRC) signaling or preconfigured.

Physical sidelink shared channels:

the PSSCH carries at least 2 of a second order SCI, a media access control-control element (MAC CE), and data. SCI may refer to first order SCI and/or second order SCI. For convenience of description, SCI refers to any one of first-order SCI, second-order SCI, first-order SCI, and second-order SCI when distinction is not made. In the time domain, on the resources without PSFCH, there are 12 symbols for carrying the PSSCH; on the resources with PSFCH, there are 9 symbols for carrying the PSSCH. On the frequency domain, occupy the continuous L _subCh Sub-channels. In addition, in one slot, the first OFDM symbol replicates information transmitted on the second symbol for automatic gain control (automatic gain control, AGC).

Physical sidelink feedback channel:

the PSFCH carries feedback information. On resources with PSFCH, the penultimate and third OFDM symbols carry PSFCH. The signal on the third last symbol is a repetition of the signal on the second last symbol so that the receiving terminal device makes AGC adjustments.

GAP symbol:

the terminal device may receive and transmit the PSSCH in two consecutive slots, respectively, or the terminal device may receive and transmit the PSSCH and the PSFCH in the same slot, respectively. Therefore, an additional symbol is required for the transmit/receive conversion of the terminal apparatus after the PSSCH and after the PSFCH symbol.

AGC symbol:

the symbol is located at the beginning of the transmission, e.g., symbol 0 of the PSCCH/PSSCH transmission, e.g., symbol 11 of the PSFCH transmission. Since the AGC adjustment cannot be performed while receiving and decoding data. The signal on the AGC symbol is thus a replica of the signal content on the next symbol. Since the SL transmission keeps the power on each symbol equal, the content of the remaining symbols can be received based on the results of the automatic gain control of the AGC symbols.

The resource bearers PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH on the 3 subchannels of 1 slot in NR as shown in (a) and (b) in Rel-16, the RBs consecutive in the frequency domain constitute subchannels. In SL-U, the frequency domain of the resource may be either contiguous RB (contiguous RB) or interleaved RB (interlaced RB). For example, the basic unit of frequency domain resource allocation is a subchannel, where the subchannel is composed of consecutive RBs or interleaved RBs. As another example, the basic unit of frequency domain resource allocation is a subchannel or an interlace, where a subchannel is composed of consecutive RBs and an interlace is composed of interleaved RBs.

AGC symbol specification:

the SL configuration or pre-configuration symbols are determined based on the higher layer parameters SL-StartSymbol and SL-lengthsymbol. The SL-StartSymbol indicates the first symbol configured for SL within the slot. The SL-LengthSymbols indicates the number of symbols configured for SL within the slot. Where SL-startsymbols is the symbol index of the first symbol of the SL-LengthSymbols consecutive symbols configured for SL. The value range of sl-StartSymbol is any one of {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 }. The value range of sl-LengthSymbols is any one of {7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14 }. The SL fractional bandwidth BWP or SL resource pool has the same SL-startsymbols and SL-LengthSymbols.

Within a slot, the resource allocation (resource allocation) of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH starts with the symbol sl-StartSymbol+1. The resource allocation may also be referred to as mapping (mapping). The symbol of PSFCH transmission 2 is the symbol of sl-StartSymbol+sl-LengthSymbols-2.

The AGC symbols are referred to in the protocol as duplicate symbols (duplicated symbol, DS). This means that the content on the symbol that mapped the first of the PSSCH is copied to this symbol. Similarly, the content on the symbol mapping the first of the PSCCHs is also copied to this symbol. The symbol mapped to the first of the PSSCH and the symbol mapped to the first of the PSCCH are the same symbol. The content on the first symbol includes PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS or CSI-RS. For example, PSCCH and PSSCH are mapped from symbol 1, and at least one of DM-RS, phase tracking reference signal (phase tracking reference signal, PT-RS) or CSI-RS is mapped on symbol 1. All resource elements RE on symbol 1 are copied to all REs of symbol 0. That is to say that symbol 1 and symbol 0 are identical.

In addition, the AGC symbol is referred to as a duplicate symbol in the protocol, also because the content on the symbol of the 2 nd of the PSFCH transmission is duplicated on the symbol of the 1 st of the PSFCH transmission. The 1 st symbol of the PSFCH transmission is a duplicate symbol, i.e., a symbol for AGC.

In case there are two ACG symbols in the slot, the first AGC symbol may be the content of the first symbol of the duplicate PSCCH/psch if the terminal device starts transmitting SL information from the first AGC symbol. The terminal device starts transmitting SL information from the second AGC symbol, which may be the content of the first symbol of the duplicate PSCCH/PSSCH.

In the following description, AGC symbols may refer to both "PSCCH/PSSCH AGC symbols" and "PSFCH AGC symbols" without causing ambiguity. If differentiation is required, the term "AGC symbol of PSCCH/PSSCH" or "AGC symbol of PSFCH" is used.

Resource pool and RB set:

NR SL communication is based on resource pool (resource pool). By resource pool is meant a block of time-frequency resources dedicated to SL communication. The resource pool contains contiguous frequency domain resources. The time domain resources contained in the resource pool can be continuous or discontinuous. The different resource pools are distinguished by RRC signaling. The terminal device receives in the reception resource pool and transmits in the transmission resource pool. If the resource pools have the same resource pool index, the time-frequency resources of the resource pools may be considered to be fully overlapping.

In SL-U, since the frequency band is shared by various types of terminal apparatuses, for example, the SL terminal apparatus and Wi-Fi terminal apparatus, bluetooth terminal apparatus transmit on the same frequency band. Therefore, there is not necessarily a notion of a SL dedicated resource pool. The SL resource pool can also be understood as: a set of resources that can be used for SL transmissions. In this embodiment, the resource pool may also be referred to as RB set, channel, working channel (Operating channel), nominal channel (Nominal Channel Bandwidth) bandwidth (bandwidth). Wherein the meanings of the channel and RB sets may be interchanged. I.e. resource pool, channel, bandwidth, RB set are all used to represent the set of resources that can be used for SL transmission.

The bandwidth of the resource pool may be at least one of {5,10,15,20,25,30,40,50,60,70,80,90,100} mhz.

The relationship of the resource pool to the channel is explained below. The bandwidth of the resource pool is c×20mhz, and C is a positive integer, such as c= {1,2,3,4,5}. There is at least one channel in the resource pool. For example, the resource pool includes one channel, the channel bandwidth is 20MHz, and the resource pool bandwidth is 20MHz. For another example, the resource pool includes 2 channels, the channel bandwidth is 20MHz, and the resource pool bandwidth is 40MHz. For another example, the resource pool includes 5 channels, the channel bandwidth is 20MHz, and the resource pool bandwidth is 100MHz.

Similarly, the relation of the resource pool and the RB set is explained. The frequency domain bandwidth of the RB set is 20MHz. The bandwidth of the resource pool is c×20Mhz or c×20+c2mhz, and C is a positive integer, such as c= {1,2,3,4,5}. For example, the bandwidth of the resource pool is 20MHz, and the resource pool contains 1 RB set. For another example, the bandwidth of the resource pool is 50MHz, and the resource pool contains 2 RB sets, which may or may not be adjacent in the frequency domain.

The terminal device may transmit PSCCH and/or PSSCH on adjacent D RB sets or may transmit PSCCH and/or PSSCH on 1 RB set in the resource pool. The terminal device is exemplified by transmitting PSCCH on a interlaces and PSSCH on B interlaces. For the terminal device to transmit on adjacent D RB sets, the terminal device transmits PSCCH on a interlaces on the RB set with the smallest RB set index; the terminal device transmits the PSSCH on D RB sets, in total, on B interlaces. For example, a=1, b=4, d=2, and the RB set index is 0 and 1, respectively, the terminal device transmits on the RB set index of 0.

Priority level:

the traffic priority of the terminal apparatus B is specifically the transmission priority of the terminal apparatus B (transmission priority). Since the terminal apparatus B may transmit a plurality of services at the same time, the priorities of the plurality of services may be different. Therefore, if the priority of the terminal apparatus B is simply described, it is not very accurate.

Traffic priority, which may also be referred to as L1 priority (L1 priority), physical layer priority, priority carried in SCI, priority corresponding to the PSSCH associated with SCI, transmission priority, priority of transmitting the PSSCH, priority for resource selection, priority of logical channel, and highest-level priority of logical channel.

The priority levels and the priority values have a certain corresponding relationship, for example, the higher the priority level is, the lower the corresponding priority value is, or the lower the priority level is, the lower the corresponding priority value is. Taking the example that the priority value corresponding to the higher priority level is lower, the range of the priority value can be an integer of 1-8 or an integer of 0-7. If the range of the priority value is 1-8, the priority value is 1, which represents the highest priority.

Unlicensed Spectrum (Unlicensed Spectrum) or Shared Spectrum (Shared):

According to the regulations for radio frequency division in the people's republic of China, in order to fully, reasonably and effectively utilize radio frequency spectrum resources, the normal operation of radio services is ensured, and the frequency bands are prevented from being divided by mutual interference among various radio services, radio stations and systems. The 2/3/4/4G technology is authorized spectrum, which needs to be applied by telecom operators for use, and has small interference and safety.

WiFi, bluetooth, zigbee, etc. technologies use unlicensed spectrum in order to act as a complementary tool for operators to enhance their service offerings. Licensed spectrum communication can be used without application and free. Communication over unlicensed spectrum may be subject to certain regulations, such as listen before talk (listen before talk, LBT) and OCB (occupied channel bandwidth, OCB) requirements, for ensuring access fairness among the various types of terminal devices operating over the spectrum. On unlicensed spectrum, various NR-U, SL-U, wiFi, bluetooth, zigbee, etc. technologies may be transmitted on the spectrum. Thus, unlicensed spectrum may also be referred to as shared spectrum. In this patent, the meaning of "unlicensed spectrum" and "shared spectrum" are the same and can be replaced with each other.

In the embodiments of the present application, SL communication over unlicensed spectrum may be referred to as SL-U. Any one of the Wi-Fi terminal device, the bluetooth terminal device, and the Zigbee terminal device may be abbreviated as a heterogeneous system terminal device for the SL terminal device.

CO and COT:

channel occupancy (channel occupancy, CO) refers to the transmission of a terminal device on one or more channels after performing a channel access procedure. The terminal device performs Type1 channel access and then occupies channel transmission for a continuous period of time, which is called channel occupation time (channel occupancy time, COT). The frequency domain unit of the COT is a channel, and the time domain unit is ms or a time slot. In the embodiment of the present application, the COT may be a time concept, that is, the time of SL transmission; but also a resource concept, i.e. the time-frequency resource occupied by SL transmissions. In the embodiments of the present application, COT and CO are the same concept unless further distinguished. The terminal device may transmit on multiple channels, either adjacent or not. In this embodiment, the terminal device transmitting in multiple channels may be understood as: the transmission of the terminal device occupies 1 COT, and the COT occupies a plurality of channels in the frequency domain; alternatively, the transmission of the terminal device occupies a plurality of COTs, each of which occupies 1 channel in the frequency domain.

The COT may be shared for transmission (COT sharing) between terminal apparatuses. The terminal device of the initial COT may share the COT to other terminal devices, i.e., for SL transmission of the other terminal devices. The terminal device of the initial COT and the terminal device of the shared COT occupy the channel for a period of continuous time to transmit COT sharing, and the corresponding conditions need to be met, for example, the terminal device of the initial COT is a receiving terminal device or a transmitting terminal device of the shared COT, and for example, the terminal device of the initial COT and the terminal device of the shared COT are members in the same group.

The transmission of the terminal device cannot exceed the limit (maximum channel occupancy time, MCOT) of the maximum channel occupation time, denoted T _cot,p . T for different CAPCs _cot,p For 1 terminal device to access the channel and transmit in COT, the transmission time does not exceed the maximum channel occupation time T _cot,p . For a plurality of terminal devices to transmit within the COT, the transmission time of the terminal device of the initial COT and the terminal device of the shared COT does not exceed the maximum channel occupation time T _cot,p . P is the CAPC of the terminal device of the initial COT; alternatively, P is a cap with the smallest cap value among terminal devices transmitting COT.

SL-RSSI measurement:

the received signal strength indication (received signal strength indicator, RSSI) is defined as the linear average of the total received power of the OFDM symbols configured for the PSCCH and PSSCH within one slot within the configured subchannel starting from the second OFDM symbol (i.e., excluding the AGC symbol). Where the symbol where the PSFCH is located does not measure RSSI.

In the actual measurement process, the energy of the resources of 1 symbol by 1 sub-channel is measured, and then the energy of the symbols in the time slot is linearly averaged to obtain 1 RSSI measurement value of the resources of 1 symbol by 1 sub-channel for 1 time slot. Wherein, among the symbols without PSFCH, the average of the energy values of the 12 th to 13 th symbols is measured; among the symbols with PSFCH, the average of the energy values of the 9 th to 10 th symbols was measured.

In NR, RSSI is 1 RSSI measurement for a resource of 1 slot by 1 subchannel. That is, if the PSCCH/PSSCH occupies 3 sub-channels, 3 RSSI measurements for each of the 3 sub-channels would be obtained.

SL-RSRP measurement:

PSSCH-RSRP is by definition the average of the useful signal (i.e., PSSCH-DMRS) power (power of the non-computed CP portion) over all REs carrying PSSCH-DMRS over the linear domain. PSCCH-RSRP is by definition the average of the useful signal (i.e., PCSCH-DMRS) power (power of the non-computed CP portion) over all REs carrying PSCCH-DMRS in the linear domain. Where the symbol where the PSFCH is does not measure RSRP.

In NR, RSRP is 1 RSRP measurement of the resources of the total subchannel for 1 slot PSSCH or PSCCH. That is, if the PSSCH occupies 3 sub-channels, 1 RSRP measurement of the 3 sub-channels would be obtained.

Preemption check (pre-emission check):

the two mechanisms of preemption assessment are newly introduced in NR-V (LTE-V does not have this mechanism) and are aimed at allowing higher priority traffic to use the resources reserved for low priority traffic, thus ensuring the reliability of high priority traffic.

The terminal determines a candidate resource set S in the time slot m according to the previous resource sensing result ₁ Wherein S is ₁ Is a candidate resource that can be used for sidelink transmission. The resource sensing result comprises the priority P indicated by the received control information _Rx Information such as RSRP measured values of the resource where the received control information is located. Terminal device determination r ₁ Reserving resource r for candidate resources for sidestream transmission through sidestream control information ₁ . Wherein the candidate resource r ₁ Belonging to candidate resource set S ₁ ，r ₁ Time domain position of (a) is time slot m.

Since there are other terminal devices in the resource pool to transmit and reserve resources between time slot n and time slot m. Therefore, the terminal device decides whether to use the resource r or not based on the new resource sensing result before the slot m ₁ . The candidate resource set determined according to the new resource sensing result before the time slot m is S ₂ 。

If the following conditions are satisfied, the terminal device reports the resource r ₁ Is preempted.

a) Resource r ₁ Not of S ₂ . (i.e. perceiving the result resource r from the new resource ₁ Is excluded from

b) Priority P indicated by received control information _Rx One of the following conditions is satisfied:

(1) The preemption priority field sl-PreemptionEnable is configured as enabled, P _Tx >P _Rx (here, the comparison of priority values, i.e., PTx level lower than PRx level)

(2) The preemption priority field sl-PreemptionEnable is configured as any one of {1,2, …,8} (i.e., prio) _pre Configured as any one of {1,2, …,8 }), P _Rx <P _pre And P is _Tx >P _Rx (similarly, here is a comparison of priority values)

In the protocol, the candidate resource sets S1, S2 are each denoted as candidate resource set SA. Although the names of S1 and S2 are different, the physical meanings of both are identical in the embodiment of the present application.

Re-evaluation (re-evaluation):

The terminal determines a candidate resource set S in the time slot m according to the previous resource sensing result ₁ Wherein S is ₁ Is a candidate resource that can be used for sidelink transmission. Terminal device determination r ₂ Resource r is reserved for candidate resources for sidestream transmissions, but not yet by sidestream control information ₂ . Wherein the candidate resource r ₂ Belonging to candidate resource set S ₁ ，r ₂ Time domain position of (a) is time slot m.

Since there are other terminal devices in the resource pool to transmit and reserve resources between time slot n and time slot m. Therefore, the terminal device decides whether to use the resource r or not based on the new resource sensing result before the slot m ₂ . The candidate resource set determined according to the new resource sensing result before the time slot m is S ₂ 。

If resource r ₂ Not of S ₂ The terminal device reports the resourcer ₂ No reevaluation was passed.

Time-frequency position of DMRS:

the DMRS includes PSCCH-DMRS and PSSCH DMRS. Wherein the PSCCH-DMRS is located in the PSCCH and the PSSCH-DMRS is located in the PSSCH. Each DMRS occupies one symbol in the time domain and one RE in the frequency domain.

Alternatively, the DMRS may also be understood as an antenna port (antenna port).

(1) Time domain position of NR DMRS:

the PSCCH-DMRS is located on each symbol of the PSCCH.

The PSSCH-DMRS is located on some symbols of the PSSCH. The time domain locations of the distribution are shown in table 1 below and fig. 2.

TABLE 1

(2) Frequency domain position of NR DMRS:

as shown in fig. 3 (a), the PSCCH-DMRS is located on the PSCCH. Taking RE as granularity, mapping one PSCCH-DMRS every 4 RE; with RB as granularity, PSCCH-DMRS is arranged on each PR. The lowest frequency domain location mapping position of the REs is aligned with the PSCCH start RE. Wherein each RB consists of 12 REs.

As shown in fig. 3 (b), the PSSCH-DMRS is located in the PSSCH. Taking RE as granularity, mapping one PSCCH-DMRS every 2 RE; with RB as granularity, PSCCH-DMRS is arranged on each PR. The lowest frequency domain location mapping position of the RE is aligned with the PSSCH starting RE. Wherein each RB consists of 12 REs.

Sidelink parameter set:

the subcarrier spacing supported by R16 NR SL and the corresponding CP length are shown in table 2. In order to reduce the implementation complexity of the terminal device, only one CP length type and one subcarrier spacing are configured on one sidelink carrier. The RB numbers are shown in table 3 under different SCS in different maximum transmission bandwidths.

Under the CP-OFDM architecture, a single subcarrier on a single OFDM symbol is the smallest unit of time-frequency resources, and is called a Resource Element (RE) in a protocol. One RB refers to a frequency domain resource unit consisting of 12 consecutive subcarriers. The minimum unit of scheduling may also be RB, for example, the scheduling unit of PSFCH is 1 symbol in the time domain and one RB in the frequency domain. The above-mentioned frequency domain granularity of the scheduling of PSCCH/PSCCH is a subchannel or interlace, with 1 subchannel consisting of {10,12,15,20,25,50,75,100} PRBs, specific values being indicated by RRC signaling or preconfigured.

TABLE 2

TABLE 3 Table 3

/>

Interlace (interleaved or interlaced resource blocks):

as shown in fig. 4 (a), the protocol defines a plurality of interleaved resource blocks (multiple interlaces of resource blocks), hereinafter referred to as interlaces. Interlace M is made up of common resource blocks (common resource block, CRB) { M, m+m,2m+m,3m+m, … }. Where M is the number of interlaces and there is M ε {0,1, …, M-1}. Optionally, the value of M is related to SCS. For example, when μ=0 (i.e., the subcarrier spacing is 15 kHz), M takes a value of 10. For another example, when μ=1 (i.e., the subcarrier spacing is 30 kHz), M takes a value of 5.

CRBThe relationship with interleaved resource blocks, BWP i and interlace m satisfies: /> Wherein->The common resource block indicating the start of BWP is the number of CBRs relative to the common resource block 0. When there is no risk of confusion, the index μmay be omitted. The terminal device expects the number of common resource blocks in the interlace contained in BWP i to be not less than 10. For convenience of description, the common resource block CRB may be understood as RB.

The resource allocation pattern includes two patterns, continuous and staggered. The interlacing can also be called interlacing, progressive and comb teeth. The 1 interlace includes N discontinuous RBs, and the transmission bandwidth includes M interlaces. Alternatively, the intervals between RBs within an interlace may be the same or different. For example, within 1 interlace, the interval of RBs may be M RBs.

The following table 4 exemplifies a 20MHz transmission bandwidth, and lists the number M of interlaces and the number N of PRBs in interlaces. The combination of at least one interlace number M and RB number N in the interlace may be determined according to a configuration or a pre-configuration.

TABLE 4 Table 4

In the embodiment of the present application, transmitting or receiving PSCCH in an interleaved manner may also be understood as "mapping PSCCH in an interleaved manner" or "decoding PSCCH in an interleaved manner", and "transmitting, transmitting or receiving PSSCH in an interleaved manner" may also be understood as "mapping PSSCH in an interleaved manner" or "decoding PSSCH in an interleaved manner".

As shown in (b) of fig. 4, RBs within the interlace are actually spaced apart. In fig. 3 (b), the horizontal axis represents the time domain (e.g., 1 slot), and the vertical axis represents the frequency domain (e.g., 1 channel). There are 3 interlaces in the channel, interlace 0, interlace 1, interlace 2, and interlace 3, respectively, each interlace containing 6 RBs. Different UEs may transmit in a frequency-division manner on different interlaces, e.g., UE1 on interlace 0, interlace 1, UE2 on interlace 2, and no UE on interlace 3. Since the left graph in fig. 3 (b) is relatively complex to describe, the same meaning is represented in the right graph in fig. 3 in the embodiment of the present application: i.e. the channel contains 4 interlaces on which different UEs transmit in a frequency-division manner.

In addition, the transmission on the channel may be staggered or non-staggered for 1 UE. As shown in fig. 4 (c), the transmission is also performed on the channel, the left diagram indicates that UE2 transmits on all interlaces of the channel in an interlaced manner, and the right diagram indicates that UE2 transmits on the channel in a non-interlaced manner. The "non-staggered mode" may also be referred to as a channel mode, a sub-channel mode, or a channel-full mode. Alternatively, a full channel may be understood as occupying at least 80% of the resources in the frequency domain.

Channel access process:

access over unlicensed spectrum requires listen before talk (listen before talk, LBT). I.e. it is determined that the channel is idle for a period of time, the terminal device is able to transmit in the channel. There are two channel access modes in the NR-U, dynamic (dynamic) and semi-static (semi-static) channel access, respectively. The terminal device adopts a dynamic or semi-static channel access method based on configuration or pre-configuration determination. Dynamic channel access may also be referred to as FBE (Frame Based Equipment) channel access. Or can also be understood as: the FBE accesses the channel through a dynamic access mode. Semi-static channel access may also be referred to as LBE (Load Based Equipment) channel access. Or can also be understood as: LBE accesses the channel through a semi-static access mode. In SL-U, both (or one) of these channel access methods should also be followed.

Dynamic channel access is suitable for the scene that SL terminals and heterogeneous system terminals transmit on unlicensed spectrum. The dynamic channel access includes two channel access types, type 1channel access and Type2 channel access, respectively. Wherein, type1LBT is based on back-off, the back-off time is related to CAPC, and the channel needs to be idle for a long time to be accessed. Type2 channel access includes three types, type 2A, type 2B, type 2C. Type2 LBT requires only a short time (e.g., 16us or 25 us) for the channel to be idle for the terminal device to access the channel. The terminal device is mainly used in COT sharing, and has corresponding execution conditions, such as the terminal device of initial COT and the terminal device sharing COT mainly have a receiving-transmitting relationship.

Type 1channel access (Type 1channel access or Type 1SL channel access):

type 1channel access may also be referred to as Type1 LBT. Comprising 2 parts: channel sensing (transfer duration) and cyclic sensing of length Td.

The channel perception of length Td consists of one tf=16 us and the subsequent consecutive mp tsl=9 us, i.e. td=tf+mp Tsl. Wherein, the sensing time of Tf is at the first 9us, and the loop sensing is entered after all sensing times of Td are idle. The mp is shown in Table 5 or Table 6, where CW _min,p ≤CW _p ≤CW _max,p For the contention window (Contention window), T _cot,p Is the maximum length of COT.

The loop sensing is a loop process based on a counter N, comprising the steps of:

step 1: let n=ninit, where Ninit is a range of values from 0 to CW _p Is a random number of (a) in the memory. Then enter step 4;

step 2: if N >0, the ue decides to decrease the counter value, let n=n-1;

step 3: sensing a channel (sense the channel) in a sensing time slot (an additional sensing slot duration), and if the sensing result is idle, entering a step 4; otherwise, enter step 5;

step 4: stopping if n=0; otherwise, enter step 2;

step 5: sensing the channel until one sensing time slot (sensing slot) in the Td is sensed as busy, or until all sensing time slots in the Td are idle;

step 6: if all the sensing time slots in the Td are idle, entering a step 4; otherwise, step 5 is entered.

TABLE 5

TABLE 6

Type 2channel access (Type 2channel access or Type 2SL channel access):

type 2channel access includes three types, type 2A, type 2B, type 2C. Type2 LBT requires only a short time (e.g., 16us or 25 us) for the channel to be idle for the UE to access the channel. The method is mainly used in COT sharing and has corresponding execution conditions, for example, the UE of the initial COT and the UE sharing the COT mainly have a transceiving relationship.

(1) Type 2A channel access: the UE perceives at least a perceiving interval T _short Transmission immediately after 25us intra-channel is idle. Specifically T _short =25us consists of 1 tf=16us perceived time slot and 1 tsl=9us perceived time slot. If both perceived time slots are idle, the channel is considered idle.

(2) Type 2B channel access: the UE transmits immediately after perceiving that the channel is idle within tf=16us. Specifically, the channel sensing occurs at the last 9us of Tf, the channel sensing time is not less than 5us, and if more than 4us sense that the channel is idle, the channel is considered to be idle.

(3) Type 2C channel access: the UE may transmit without channel awareness for a maximum of 584us.

As shown in fig. 5, semi-static channel access is suitable for a scenario where only SL terminals transmit on the unlicensed spectrum. In semi-static channel access, the base station or terminal device uses T in every two consecutive radio frames _x The channel is occupied for a period. i.T occupying radio frames with even index at the beginning time point _x At or i.T _x At +offset. The duration of the occupied channel is at most 0.95T _x . In period T _x Last max (0.05T) _x 100 us) duration is the idle duration of the cycle. The base station or the terminal apparatus does not transmit in the idle time. Wherein T is _x Configured or preconfigured, for example, to be at least any one of {1,2,2.5,4,5,10} ms;

retransmission reservation and period reservation:

in the NR mechanism, three fields, i.e. frequency domain resource indication (frequency resource assignment, FRS), time domain resource indication (time resource assignment, TRA), resource reservation period (resource reservation period, RRP), may indicate resource reservation for retransmission and/or periodic transmission. As shown in fig. 6, the frequency domain indication field indicates the number of subchannels and frequency domain locations of the initial transmission and retransmission, e.g., SCI on R1 resource indicates the number of subchannels and frequency domain locations of R1, R2, and R3. The time domain indication field indicates a time interval between the retransmission resource and the primary transmission resource, such as a time interval from the end position of the R1 time slot to the end position of the R2 time slot and a time interval from the end position of the R1 time slot to the end position of the R3 time slot indicated by SCI on the R1 resource. The resource reservation period field indicates a resource reservation period, such as the time interval of R1 and R4, the time interval of R2 and R5, and the time interval of R3 and R6 in fig. 6.

Taking SCI to indicate 3 resources (nmax=3) as an example, time domain, frequency domain, and subchannel information of 3 resources can be represented by frequency domain resource allocation and frequency domain resource allocation. The first resource is the resource where the PSCCH/PSSCH is currently sent, and the second two resources are reserved for retransmission. In addition, due to the resource reservation period field in SCI, the UE may also reserve periodic resources of the above 3 resources periodically.

It should be understood that the "SCI indicated resource" in the embodiment of the present application may be either a resource that currently transmits the PSCCH/PSSCH, a retransmission reserved resource, or a periodic reserved resource.

As shown in fig. 6, SCI is detected on R1 resources at the UE (indicated by solid line) and resources to be used for resource transmission are reserved (indicated by dotted line). The two fields of the time domain resource indication and the frequency domain resource indication in SCI indicate the 3 resources R1, R2 and R3 (nmax=3), where R2 and R3 reserve resources for retransmission. The reservation period (or reservation interval) field in SCI indicates R4, which is 1 resource, R4 reserves resources for the period of R1. Since the frequency domain resources reserved in the period are the same, the time domain resources are integer times of the period, which is equivalent to the reservation of R5 in the period of R2 and the reservation of R6 in the period of R3. I.e. R4 is considered reserved for R5 and R6, although R4 is not used for sidestream transmission when SCI on R1 is detected. The above procedure is called chain reservation.

With the development of wireless communication technology, there is an increasing demand for proximity services with which surrounding people or things communicate, so device-to-device (D2D) technology has grown. The application of the D2D technology can reduce the burden of a cellular network, reduce the battery power consumption of user equipment, improve the data transmission rate and well meet the requirement of the proximity service of a user. D2D technology allows multiple D2D enabled user devices to directly discover and communicate with or without a network infrastructure. In view of the characteristics and advantages of the D2D technology, a vehicle networking application scenario based on the D2D technology is proposed, but due to the consideration of safety, the requirement on time delay in the scenario is very high, and the existing D2D technology cannot meet the requirement on safety.

Thus under the network of LTE technology proposed by the third generation partnership project (the 3rd generation partnership project,3GPP), internet of vehicles technology is proposed, vehicle-to-anything communication (vehicle to everything, V2X), V2X communication referring to vehicle-to-anything communication with the outside world, including vehicle-to-vehicle communication (vehicle to vehicle, V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian communication (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P), vehicle-to-infrastructure communication (vehicle to infrastructure, V2I), vehicle-to-network communication (vehicle to network, V2N).

V2X communication is a basic technology and a key technology applied to high-speed equipment represented by vehicles in the scene with very high requirements on communication delay in the future, such as intelligent automobiles, automatic driving, intelligent transportation systems and the like. The V2X communication may support communication scenarios with and without network coverage, and the resource allocation manner may adopt a network access device scheduling mode, such as an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network Node B (E-UTRAN Node B, abbreviated as eNB) scheduling mode and a terminal device self-selection mode. Based on V2X technology, a Vehicle user (V-terminal device for short) can send some information of the Vehicle user itself, such as information of position, speed, intention (turning, doubling, reversing) and other periodic and some aperiodic event-triggered information to surrounding V-terminal devices, and similarly, the V-terminal devices can also receive information of surrounding users in real time.

SL-U is a new communication scene of side communication in Rel-18, communication technology adopts a V2X communication architecture, and the communication scene is extended to short-distance communication between smart home, and communication between wearing equipment, mobile phones and computers of AR/VR/XR. The links of the D2D communication, the LTE V2X communication, the NR V2X communication and the SL-U communication are all side links (sidelink). In the embodiment of the application, the sidestream communication comprises at least any one of D2D communication, LTE V2X communication, NR V2X communication and SL-U communication.

SL transmissions include PSCCH/PSSCH transmissions, PSFCH transmissions, and the like. Taking the AGC symbol of PSCCH/PSSCH transmission as an example, the AGC symbol is located in the first symbol carrying PSCCH/PSSCH in R16, i.e., symbol 0. AGC is required before SL transmission, otherwise, the received power is larger than the maximum power that the terminal device can receive or the received power is smaller than the maximum power that the terminal device can decode. If the signal power can be reduced or amplified so that the final power can be located within one section, the receiving terminal device can effectively decode the SL information. The processing flow of the terminal device is to conduct AGC adjustment, storage and decoding. The terminal device cannot decode while performing AGC adjustment. Therefore, the SL information on the AGC symbol is a copy of the SL information of the next symbol.

In addition, each time slot may have different SL devices transmitting information from different geographic locations, and the received power of each time slot may be different. Therefore, the receiving terminal apparatus needs to perform AGC adjustment every reception slot. Even in the same time slot, PSCCH/PSSCH transmission, PSFCH transmission may come from different SL terminal devices in different geographic locations. Therefore, symbol 0 and symbol 11 in the same slot are subjected to AGC adjustment 2 times. In R16/R17, the other symbols in the slot do not have to AGC adjustments, because the power of each symbol of PSCCH/PSSCH is the same and the power of 2 symbols of PSFCH is the same. Therefore, in the slot with PSFCH, the terminal device will perform AGC adjustment only at symbol 0 and symbol 11; in a slot without PSFCH, the terminal device will only make AGC adjustments at symbol 0.

In SL-U, SL information can be transmitted after LBT is successful. But the time that LBT succeeds is uncertain and may be anywhere in the slot. As shown in fig. 7, the terminal device successfully LBT before symbol 6 of the first slot and transmits information at symbol 6, at this time, the terminal device does not perform AGC adjustment at symbol 6, and thus it is difficult to secure reliability of SL information of symbols 6 to 12 in the first slot. This leads to a contradictory result that if the terminal device transmits SL information at symbols 6 to 12 in the first slot, the reliability of the information is difficult to guarantee (since AGC is not performed); if the terminal device does not transmit SL information in symbols 6 to 12 in the first slot, it is highly likely that other terminal devices access channels in these symbols, resulting in the terminal device not being able to transmit information in the second slot; even if the terminal device can transmit in the second slot, this corresponds to a delay of several symbols after LBT is successful.

Also, AGC adjustment per slot is impractical. On the one hand, each time AGC symbol in one time slot is added, the corresponding hardware cost is increased; on the other hand, the terminal device cannot decode while performing AGC adjustment, and adjusting AGC for each slot means that SL information cannot be received and decoded for each slot. Therefore, the number of AGC symbols can be increased in the slot to solve the above problem. The addition of AGC symbols aims to increase the channel access points within the symbols. The terminal device can then access the channel at the second AGC symbol in the slot without waiting for re-access at the first AGC symbol in the next slot. As shown in fig. 6, there are 2 PSCCH/PSSCH AGC symbols in one slot, located at symbols 0 and 7, respectively. Where "symbol 7" is an example, other symbols are in fact possible. The end device may succeed in LBT before symbol 0 or symbol 7, and one may start SL transmission after LBT success, but either transmit CPE before symbol 0 or symbol 7 or CPE before symbol 1 or symbol 8 (CPE also copies the content of some of the PSCCH/PSSCH symbols) and start carrying PSCCH/PSSCH (called valid data) at symbol 0 or symbol 7. Another possibility is that no transmission is made after LBT has succeeded, and either symbol 0 or symbol 7 begins transmission again. In either case, the active PSCCH/PSSCH is carried from either symbol 0 or symbol 7. In the embodiment of the present application, the PSCCH/PSSCH is transmitted from symbol 0 or from symbol 7 for both cases. And, starting transmission of PSCCH/PSSCH at symbol i can also be understood as starting access to the channel from symbol i, i being any integer from 0 to 13.

However, adding multiple ACG symbols to the slot may also cause further problems, as shown in fig. 8, in that the transmitting terminal device may transmit PSCCH/PSSCH from symbol 0 or PSCCH/PSSCH from symbol 7. The receiving terminal device does not know from which symbol the transmitting terminal device starts transmission. AGC adjustments will be made at both symbol 0 and symbol 7. While the AGC adjustment by the receiving terminal device on symbol 7 results in: even if the transmitting terminal apparatus starts transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH at symbol 0, the receiving terminal apparatus cannot receive SL information on symbol 7 (black mark in fig. 8). As shown in table 1, taking the example that the DMRS symbol is located in symbols 1, 4, 7, and 10, the receiving terminal apparatus cannot receive the DMRS on the symbol 7 when the AGC is adjusted. This has an impact on channel estimation and decoding.

As shown in (a) to (d) of fig. 9, the method for transmitting information provided in the embodiment of the present application may be applied to a terminal direct communication (side-link communication), a vehicle networking, a cellular communication (including 5G NR communication, LTE), and a WiFi communication system. The terminal device may communicate via a sidelink when there is no network coverage. The terminal device may be located within the coverage area of the network device, and the terminal device within the coverage area may perform direct communication (sidelink communication) with the terminal device outside the coverage area.

Fig. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application. The method 1000 may include the following steps.

S1001, determining N candidate start symbols for transmission side line information in the first time slot

Wherein the first time slot includes M symbols, and the M symbols include N candidate start symbols for transmitting side line information.

Optionally, the sidelink information includes at least one of a PSCCH and PSSCH copy information, PSCCH, PSSCH, PSFCH, DMRS, CSI-RS, PT-RS, S-SSB, CPE. Alternatively, the SL information may not include a symbol for AGC. Alternatively, the sidestream information may not include CPE.

Optionally, the M symbols include N candidate start symbols for transmission side row information, e.g., m=14, and further e.g., n=2 or 3.

S1002, the sidelink information is received in the first slot according to a time domain position of a start symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information.

Wherein the start symbol may be a start symbol for transmitting side row information.

It should be understood that the execution subject of the above steps may be the receiving terminal device or the first terminal device.

In a possible implementation, the method 1000 further includes: and performing Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on an ith symbol in N candidate starting symbols for transmitting side line information, wherein i is an integer smaller than M, and side line control information and/or demodulation reference signals are not existed in a first time range before the ith symbol.

Alternatively, the first time range may be understood as: the starting symbol for transmission side line information of the candidate before the ith symbol and one or more symbols between the ith symbol, for example, in the first slot, there are 2 starting symbols for transmission side line information of the candidate, i symbol and q symbol, respectively, and the position of the q symbol in the first slot is located before the ith symbol, and then the first time range is one or more symbols between the q symbol and the ith symbol. For another example, when m=14, the i-th symbol is symbol 7 and the q-th symbol is symbol 0, the first time range may be symbol interval {1,2,3}.

In a possible implementation, the method 1000 further includes: and not performing AGC on a j-th symbol in the N candidate initial symbols for transmitting side line information, wherein the j-th symbol is positioned after an i-th symbol in the N candidate initial symbols for transmitting side line information, side line control information and/or demodulation reference signals are detected in a second time range after the i-th symbol, and i and j are integers smaller than M.

Alternatively, the second time range may be understood as one or more symbols between the i-th symbol and the j-th symbol. For example, in the first slot, when m=14, the ith symbol is symbol 0 and the jth symbol is symbol 4, then the second time range may be the symbol interval {1,2}

In a possible implementation, the start symbol is the i-th symbol, and the method 1000 further includes: and determining the sidestream information transmitted on the jth symbol as sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information, wherein the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to N candidate initial symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol in the time domain, and i and j are integers smaller than M.

The side row control information and/or side row data information is side row information on the j-th symbol. The sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information may be transmitted over multiple symbols. Optionally, sidestream information of different content is transmitted over the plurality of symbols.

In a possible implementation manner, the position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

Alternatively, the position of the j-th symbol in the first slot is a fixed value, which can be further understood as the position of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information is a fixed value.

In a possible implementation, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting side row information include: the first symbol and the second symbol, or one first symbol and one second symbol, or one first symbol and N-1 second symbols.

For example, when n=2, the candidate start symbol for transmission side line information may be a first symbol and the second symbol, and when n=3, for example, the candidate start symbol for transmission side line information may be a first symbol, a first second symbol, and a second symbol.

Alternatively, the N candidate start symbols for transmission side row information may be understood as AGC symbols in the embodiments of the present application.

Optionally, the first symbol is located before the second symbol in the time domain. Optionally, the first symbol is the first symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmission side row information.

In a possible implementation, the method 1000 further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to the first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or the network device is configured to the first terminal device, the ith symbol is a first symbol or a second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is a second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can determine, according to the first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field, so that the receiving terminal device can receive the transmission sidestream information on the second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, determining a start symbol of the transmission side line information includes: and determining the ith symbol as a starting symbol of the transmission side line information in a third time range after the ith symbol, wherein the side line control information and/or the demodulation reference signal exist in the third time range.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol not mapped to the demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

In the embodiment of the application, the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is not mapped on the j symbol, or the symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the j symbol, or the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is mapped on the j symbol, and the demodulation reference signal on the symbol adjacent to the j symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the j symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the j symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the j symbol is solved.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map the demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols of a mapping demodulation reference signal, wherein q ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

When the receiving terminal device (also referred to as a first terminal device) performs AGC adjustment on the j-th symbol, it cannot receive DMRS on the symbol, which affects channel estimation and decoding.

Alternatively, the first terminal device may receive an SCI from the second terminal device, the SCI indicating the first time domain pattern, or the SCI indicating the second time domain pattern.

In the embodiment of the present application, the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is not mapped on the jth symbol, or the symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is mapped on each symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the j-th symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the symbol is solved.

It should be understood that the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol may be understood as not overlapping with the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal or the j-th symbol is not the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

The above possible implementation manner can be understood as the following meaning:

meaning 1: if the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

Meaning 2: the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

Alternatively, the possible implementations described above can be understood as follows:

meaning 1: if the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

Meaning 2: the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol isAnd the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

The possible implementations described above may also include any of several embodiments:

in one embodiment, the jth symbol is the symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In one embodiment, the jth symbol is the symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, demodulation is not included on the j-th symbolReference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In one embodiment, the side information on the jth symbol is a copy of the side information on the xth symbol, including: the x symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal; alternatively, the xth symbol is the mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

Optionally, the x-th symbol is a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal may include at least one of: the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal mapped on the x-th symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal mapped on the x-th symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the x-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal; alternatively, the x-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal.

Optionally, the x-th symbol is not a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal may include at least one of: the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the xth symbol is not a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal; alternatively, the j-th symbol is not a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the x-th symbol is not a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal.

In one embodiment, the xth symbol is the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

In the above possible implementation manner, after step S1002, the method 1000 may further include: the first terminal device is at the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

In the above possible implementation manner, after step S1002, the method 1000 may further include: at j+q according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating demodulation reference signals on the individual symbols; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, and q is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, after step S1002, the method 1000 may further include: decoding side row data information carried on symbols before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decoding side row data information carried on symbols after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol.

The above possible implementation manner may be further understood as: in the first time slot, the side row data information carried on the symbol before the j symbol is decoded according to the demodulation reference signal before the j symbol, and/or in the first time slot, the side row data information carried on the symbol after the j symbol is decoded according to the demodulation reference signal after the j symbol.

In a possible implementation, the method 1000 further includes: mapping side line data information according to the symbol index and then according to the resource unit index; and/or mapping side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

The information transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described above with the receiving terminal device as the execution subject, and the information transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described below with the transmitting terminal device as the execution subject.

Fig. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a method for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application. The method 1100 may include the following steps.

S1101, determining N candidate start symbols for transmission side line information in the first slot,

S1102, transmitting the side line information in the first slot according to the time domain position of the start symbol in the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information.

Wherein the start symbol is a start symbol for transmitting side line information.

It should be understood that the execution subject of the above steps may be the transmitting terminal device or the second terminal device.

In the embodiment of the present application, the transmitting terminal device can transmit the side line information in the first slot according to the time domain position of the start symbol in the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, so that the receiving terminal device determines on which symbol to perform AGC adjustment according to the position of the start symbol.

In a possible implementation, the method 1100 further includes: and determining the sidestream information transmitted on the jth symbol as sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information, wherein the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to N candidate initial symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol in the time domain, and i and j are integers smaller than M.

Optionally, the i-th symbol is a start symbol for transmitting side line information, and the i-th symbol is a symbol on which the transmission side line control information is copied and/or the side line data information is copied.

Optionally, the i-th symbol is the first candidate start symbol for transmission side line information after the second terminal apparatus LBT is successful.

In one possible implementation, the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first slot.

In the embodiment of the application, the position of the jth symbol in the first time slot is set to be a fixed value, so that the transmitting terminal device can determine the position of the jth symbol in the first time slot according to the fixed value.

In a possible implementation, the method 1100 further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to the first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or the network device is configured to the second terminal device, the ith symbol is a first symbol or a second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is a second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, determining a start symbol of the transmission side line information includes: and determining the ith symbol as a starting symbol of the transmission side line information when the side line control information and/or the demodulation reference signal exist in a third time range after the ith symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol not mapped to a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on a symbol adjacent to the jth symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal symbol mapped on the jth symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map the demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping demodulation reference signals, wherein q is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

In the embodiment of the present application, the symbol of the demodulation reference signal is not mapped on the jth symbol, or the symbol indicated by the demodulation reference signal time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, or the jth+q symbol ₁ And j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is mapped on each symbol, so that the problem that the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the symbol when performing AGC adjustment on the j-th symbol is solved.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

Alternatively, q ₁ Or q ₂ Is preconfigured to the second terminal device, or q1 or q2 is a network device configured to the second terminal device, or q ₁ Or q ₂ Is preset.

The possible implementations described above may also include embodiments that are any of the following:

in one embodiment, the jthThe symbol is the symbol of the mapping demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In one embodiment, the jth symbol is the symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In one embodiment, the xth symbol is the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, after step S1102, the method 1100 further includes: at j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

In a possible implementation manner, after step S1102, the method 1100 further includes: mapping the demodulation reference signal on the j+q or j-q symbol according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, and q is an integer less than or equal to M.

In one possible implementation, the side row data information is mapped according to the symbol index and then according to the resource unit index; and/or mapping side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

Fig. 12 is a schematic flow chart of another method for information transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application. Method 1200 may include the following steps.

S1201, N candidate start symbols for transmission side line information in the first slot are determined.

The first time slot comprises M symbols, the M symbols comprise N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is the initial symbol of the transmitting side line information, a jth symbol is a symbol for copying the transmitting side line control information and/or copying the side line data information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol, i and j are integers smaller than M, and the N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting side line information comprise the ith symbol and the jth symbol;

And S1202, receiving sidestream information in a first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

Because of the method 1000, the receiving terminal device determines whether there is the sidelink control information or the demodulation reference signal in the first time range, the second time range, or the third time range, and some receiving terminal devices may have a slower data processing speed, and may not determine whether there is the sidelink control information or the demodulation reference signal after the ith symbol when the receiving terminal device appears in the jth symbol, so that the receiving terminal device cannot determine whether to decode according to the sidelink control information or the sidelink data information.

In a possible implementation, the N candidate start symbols for the transmission side line information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or a first symbol and N-1 second symbols.

In a possible implementation, the method 1200 further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to the first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or the network device is configured to the first terminal device, the ith symbol is a first symbol or a second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is a second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

Alternatively, the ith symbol may be a first symbol, the jth symbol may be a second symbol, or the ith symbol may be a first second symbol, and the jth symbol may be a second symbol. The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the Or the ith symbol may be a first symbol and the jth symbol may be a first second symbol and a second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the j-th symbol is a symbol for copying transmission side line control information and/or copying side line data information, including: the lateral information of the jth symbol is the copy of the lateral control information and/or the copy of the lateral data information of the first symbol after the jth symbol; or the lateral information of the j symbol is the copy of the lateral control information and/or the copy of the lateral data information of the last symbol before the j symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is a copy of the x-th symbol carrying sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the x-th symbol of sidestream data information, where x is any integer belonging to 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of sidestream data information.

In this embodiment of the present application, when the sidestream information on the jth symbol is duplication of sidestream control information and/or duplication of sidestream data information, duplication of information on the jth symbol may be the above-mentioned various cases, and in this manner, the content carried on the jth symbol is more flexible and various.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

meaning 1: if the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbolDemodulation reference signal for the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

Meaning 2: the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In one embodiment, the jth symbol is the symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the jth symbol is mappedIs the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the j symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In one embodiment, the xth symbol is the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

In the above possible implementation manner, after step S1202, the method 1200 may further include: the first terminal device is at the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

In the above possible implementation manner, after step S1202, the method 1200 may further include: at j+q according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating demodulation reference signals on the individual symbols; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, and q is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, after step S1202, the method 1200 may further include: decoding side row data information carried on symbols before the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decoding side row data information carried on symbols after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol.

In a possible implementation, the method 1200 further includes: determining a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to the second field; the second field indicates access overhead of the transmission side line information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured to the first terminal device by the network device, or indicated to the first terminal device by the second terminal device, and the first symbol number is the symbol number of the transmission side line control information and/or the side line data information.

The second field may also be predefined. For example, the access overhead of the first terminal apparatus is a value indicated by the second field.

Alternatively, the second field may be located in the sidestream control information SCI, the second field may be located in the first order sidestream control information, or the second field may be RRC or PC5-RRC signaling, where the PC5 interface is used for the SCCH control plane protocol stack of the RRC connection.

In a possible implementation manner, the second field indicates an access overhead of the transmission side line information, including: the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information from the first symbol after the first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information from the second symbol or the first symbol after the first second symbol, and the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, and the value of the second field is a third value.

In a possible implementation manner, the first time slot includes a first symbol and a second symbol, and determining, according to the second field, the number of the first symbols in the first time slot includes:

the value of the second field is a first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-2，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-2，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-2, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-1；Len ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-1，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ Is the firstThe interval (or first field) of the symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

In a possible implementation manner, the first time slot includes a first symbol and two second symbols, and determining, according to the second field, the number of the first symbols in the first time slot includes:

the value of the second field is a first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-3，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-3，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-3, len is the value indicated by the first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

The value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-2，Len ₂ A value indicated for a second length field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-2，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the first symbol andthe interval of the second symbol, X is GAP symbol number; len-S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

The value of the second field is a third value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₃ -X-1，Len ₃ For a third length field (or, a second, first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₂ ’-X-1，Len ₂ ' is a second length field (or a second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₃ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ For the value indicated by the third start field (or, the second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field (or the second first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₃ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₃ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-S ₂ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ ' is the spacing of the first symbol from the second, second symbol.

The value of the second field is a first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-2，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-2，Len ₀ ' as the firstA value indicated by a length field, X being the number of GAP symbols; len-X-2, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

Optionally, the first number of symbols is a number of symbols that may be used for transmitting sidestream control information and/or sidestream control information. Among other things, transmission can also be understood as resource allocation (resource allocation), mapping (mapping), multiplexing (multiplexing).

Optionally, the first number of symbols comprises a number of symbols that may be used for transmission side row feedback information PSFCH. Alternatively, the first terminal device determines the number of symbols for transmission side control information and/or side control information from the difference between the first number of symbols and the number of symbols for transmission side feedback information PSFCH when calculating the TBS.

the value of the second field is a first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-3，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-3，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-3, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For values indicated by the second length field (or, alternatively, the first and second length fields), X is the number of GAP symbols, 0.5X (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is the value indicated by the first and second length fields, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ The value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ The value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +5) -X, len is the first Length field indicationIs of the value S of (2) ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the first second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbol (or the first and first fields), and X is the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is a third value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₃ )–X-2，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₃ A value indicated for the third length field (or, a second first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₂ ’)–X-2，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₂ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or a second first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₃ ) -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ For the value indicated by the three start field (or, the second, first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ ') -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₃ ) -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₃ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-0.5 x (S ₂ ') -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol (or the second first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols.

The method 1200 is described above using a receiving terminal device as an execution subject, and the information transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described below using a transmitting terminal device as an execution subject.

Fig. 13 is a schematic flow chart of another method for information transmission according to an embodiment of the present application. The method 1300 may include the following steps.

S1301, determining N candidate start symbols for transmission side line information in the first slot.

and S1302, transmitting side line information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to the first starting field; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or the network device is configured to the first terminal device, the ith symbol is a first symbol or a second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is a second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

In the embodiment of the application, the sending terminal device can determine the position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first starting field and the first field, so that the sending terminal device transmits the sidestream information on the second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, j symbols are symbols for copying transmission side line control information and/or copying side line data information, including: the lateral information of the jth symbol is the copy of the lateral control information and/or the copy of the lateral data information of the first symbol after the jth symbol; or the lateral information of the j symbol is the copy of the lateral control information and/or the copy of the lateral data information of the last symbol before the j symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is a copy of the x-th symbol carrying sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the x-th symbol of sidestream data information, where x is any integer belonging to 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of sidestream data information.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on the symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; alternatively, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the jth+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

In one embodiment, the xth symbol is the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, after step S1302, the method 1300 further includes: at j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

In a possible implementation manner, after step S1302, the method 1300 further includes: mapping the demodulation reference signal on the j+q or j-q symbol according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, and q is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: determining a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to the second field; the second field indicates the access overhead of the transmission side line information, and the second field is preconfigured, or configured to the second terminal device by the network device, or configured to the first terminal device by the second terminal device, wherein the first number of symbols is the number of symbols of the transmission side line control information and/or the side line data information.

The second field may also be predefined. For example, the access overhead of the second terminal apparatus is a value indicated by the second field.

In a possible implementation manner, the second field indicates an access overhead of the transmission side line information, including: the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information from the first symbol after the first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information from the second symbol or the first symbol after the first second symbol, and the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, and the value of the second field is a third value.

the value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-1；Len ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-1，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) of the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₁ ' X-1, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is a first symbol and a second symbolThe interval of the numbers (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols.

The value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: len (Len) ₂ -X-2，Len ₂ A value indicated for a second length field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₁ ’-X-2，Len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+S ₁ -S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a first second start field (or a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-S ₂ -X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ X is the number of GAP symbols, which is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol; len-S ₁ ' X-2, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols。

The value of the second field is a first value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of the following: len (Len) ₁ -X-2，Len ₁ For the value indicated by the first length field, X is the number of GAP symbols; len (Len) ₀ ’-X-2，Len ₀ ' is a value indicated by a first length field, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-X-2, len being a value indicated by the first length field, X being the number of GAP symbols;

the value of the second field is the secondThe value, the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For a value indicated by a second length field (or, alternatively, a first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; 0.5 x (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second length field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ For the value indicated by the second start field (or, the first field), X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ For the value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +3) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ ' is the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols.

the value of the second field is a second value, and the first number of symbols is at least one of: 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X，Len ₁ Len for the value indicated by the first length field ₂ For values indicated by the second length field (or, alternatively, the first and second length fields), X is the number of GAP symbols, 0.5X (Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X，Len ₀ ' value indicated by the first Length field, len ₁ ' is the value indicated by the first and second length fields, and X is the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₂ -5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ The value indicated by the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field (or, a first field), X being the number of GAP symbols; len+0.5 (S ₁ -S ₁ ' 5) -X, len is the value indicated by the first Length field, S ₁ The value indicated by the first start field, S ₁ ' is a value indicated by a second start field (or, a first field), and X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₂ +5) -X, len is the value S indicated by the first Length field ₂ For the interval (or first field) between the first symbol and the first second symbol, X is the number of GAP symbols; len-0.5 x (S ₁ ' +5) -X, len is a first LengthThe value indicated by the field S ₁ ' is the interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbol (or the first and first fields), and X is the number of GAP symbols;

Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the number and positions of preconfigured AGC symbols according to an embodiment of the present application, and the method shown in fig. 14 may be a specific implementation of preconfiguring N candidate transmission side line information start symbols in the first slot in methods 1000 to 1300.

The AGC symbols may include a first AGC symbol and a second AGC symbol. The first AGC symbol may also be referred to as a first replica symbol, and the first ACG symbol may be a first symbol of a slot indicated by sl-StartSymbol. The second AGC symbol may also be referred to as a second replica symbol or an additional AGC symbol, which is located differently in the time slot than the first AGC symbol.

It should be appreciated that the first AGC symbol and the second AGC symbol described above may be N candidate start symbols for transmission side row information in methods 1000 through 1300. For example, the first AGC symbol may be a first symbol and the second AGC symbol may be a second symbol. For another example, the first AGC symbol may be an i-th symbol and the second AGC symbol may be a j-th symbol.

Alternatively, the second AGC symbol may be located at least any one of the symbols 1 to 13 of the slot in the time domain. The second AGC symbol may be one or more, and may be referred to as a q-th second AGC symbol when there are a plurality of second AGC symbols. The value range of Q belongs to {1,2, …, Q }. The value range of Q belongs to any one of {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14 }.

Alternatively, if the terminal device starts transmitting SL information from the first AGC symbol, the first AGC symbol may be the content of the first symbol of the duplicate PSCCH/PSSCH. If the terminal device starts transmitting SL information from the second AGC symbol, the second AGC symbol may be the content of the first symbol of the duplicate PSCCH/psch.

For example, as shown in fig. 14, symbol 0 indicated by SL-StartSymbol, the terminal apparatus starts transmitting SL information from symbol 0, where symbol 0 may be a first AGC symbol and symbol 7 may be a second AGC symbol. Where symbol 0 is the content of the first symbol (symbol 2) of the replicated PSCCH/PSSCH. If the terminal device starts transmitting SL information from symbol 7, symbol 7 may be a second AGC symbol, where symbol 7 is the content of the first symbol (symbol 8) of the duplicate PSCCH/psch.

Alternatively, transmission may also be understood as transmission (transmit), reception (receive), mapping (mapping), multiplexing (multiplexing).

In particular, how a terminal device configures or pre-configures a second AGC symbol within a time slot, which may be determined based on at least one of the following methods.

Method 1: the location of the 1 second AGC symbol within the slot is preconfigured or network configured.

In one possible implementation, the position of 1 second AGC symbol within a slot is a fixed value.

The fixed value may be preset, for example, and the fixed value may belong to any one of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }. For example, taking fig. 14 as an example, the second AGC symbol in the preconfigured slot is located at symbol 7.

In one possible implementation, the first field indicates the location of 1 second AGC symbol within the slot.

Illustratively, the value of the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol within the slot is located at any one of symbols 0 through 13, or the value of the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol within the slot is located at any one of symbols 1 through 13. That is, the value of the first field belongs to at least any one of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }. For example, taking fig. 14 as an example, the first field indicates sym7, indicating that the second AGC symbol within the slot is located at symbol 7.

Optionally, the first field is any one of a field, a message, information, and a cell in the RRC message.

In one possible implementation, the first field indicates a spacing of 1 second AGC symbol from the first AGC symbol within the time slot.

Alternatively, the interval represents an interval between the end position of the first AGC symbol and the start position of the second AGC symbol, or the interval represents an interval between the start position of the first AGC symbol and the end position of the second AGC symbol.

Alternatively, the above interval may be understood as an offset, and the unit of the above interval may be a symbol.

Method 2: the positions of the Q second AGC symbols within the slot are preconfigured or network configured.

In one possible implementation, the positions of the Q second AGC symbols within the time slot are fixed values.

The fixed value may be preset, and the fixed value belongs to any one or several of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }. For example, the second AGC symbol within the preconfigured slot is located at symbol 4 and symbol 8.

In one possible implementation, the Q first fields indicate the locations of the Q second AGC symbols within the time slot.

Illustratively, the value of the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol within the slot is located at any Q of symbols 0 through 13, or the value of the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol within the slot is located at any Q of symbols 1 through 13. That is, the value of the first field belongs to at least any Q of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }. For example, 2 first fields indicate sym4 and sym8, respectively, indicating that the second AGC symbol within the slot is located at symbol 4 and symbol 8.

Optionally, the Q first fields implicitly indicate that there are Q second AGC symbols within a slot.

In one possible implementation, Q first fields respectively indicate intervals of M second AGC symbols and the first AGC symbols within a slot.

Alternatively, the above-described interval may be understood as an offset. The unit of the above interval may be a symbol.

In one possible implementation, 1 first field indicates the location of at least Q second AGC symbols within a time slot, or 1 first field indicates the spacing of Q second AGC symbols from a first AGC symbol within a time slot.

The value of the first field indicates that at least Q second AGC symbols within a slot are located at any Q of symbols 0 through 13 or that at least Q second AGC symbols within a slot are located at any Q of symbols 1 through 13. I.e. the value of the first field belongs to at least any Q or a combination of at least any Q of { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13 }.

For example, the value of the first field belongs to at least any one of { none, sym i, sym j, sym i and sym j }, where sym i and sym j are used to indicate any 2 different symbols belonging to { sym0, sym1, sym2, sym3, sym4, sym5, sym6, sym7, sym8, sym9, sym10, sym11, sym12, sym13} respectively. A value of the first field of none indicates no second AGC symbol or that the first AGC symbol coincides with the second AGC symbol; a value sym i for the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol i; a value sym j for the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol j; the value sym i and sym j of the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol i and symbol j.

The method for (pre-) configuring and mapping a first AGC and a second AGC of a terminal device, which may be determined based on at least any one of the following methods, is specifically described below:

method 1: n sets of start field and length field indicate symbols in a slot for transmitting SL information

The N sets of start field and length field indicate the symbols used for transmitting SL information within the slot. N belongs to at least any one of {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14}, for example n=2. Optionally, n=q+1, where Q is the number of second AGC symbols.

Optionally, the N sets of start and length fields include: a first start field, a first length field, a second start field, a second length field, a third start field, a third length field, …, an nth start field, an nth length field.

The first start field indicates a start symbol for transmitting SL information in a slot, and the first length field indicates the number of start symbols for transmitting SL information. Optionally, the first AGC is located on a symbol of the first start field finger. Optionally, the PSSCH and/or PSCCH is mapped starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the first start field. Optionally, the SL information carried on the first AGC symbol is a copy of the SL information carried on the first symbol of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH. Optionally, the SL information includes at least one of PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS and CSI-RS. Optionally, the mapping of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the first start field may also be understood as: the SL information is transmitted starting from the first AGC symbol.

The second start field (i.e. "first field" or "1 st first field" above) indicates a start symbol for transmitting SL information in a slot, and the second length field is used for transmitting the number of start symbols for SL information. Optionally, the second AGC is located on a symbol of the second start field finger. Optionally, the PSSCH and/or PSCCH is mapped starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the second start field. Optionally, the SL information carried on the second AGC symbol is a copy of the SL information carried on the PSSCH and/or PSCCH first symbol. Optionally, the SL information includes at least one of PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS and CSI-RS. Optionally, the mapping of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the second start field may also be understood as: the SL information is transmitted starting from the second AGC symbol.

The third start field (i.e. "first field" or "2 nd first field" above) indicates a start symbol for transmitting SL information in a slot, and the third length field is used for transmitting the number of start symbols for SL information. Optionally, the third AGC is located on a symbol of the third start field finger. Optionally, the PSSCH and/or PSCCH is mapped starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the third start field. Optionally, the SL information carried on the third AGC symbol is a copy of the SL information carried on the PSSCH and/or PSCCH first symbol. Optionally, the SL information includes at least one of PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS and CSI-RS. Optionally, the mapping of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the third start field may also be understood as: the transmission of SL information starts with the third AGC symbol.

Optionally, the value of the first length field is the sum of the value of the second length field and the value of the second start field. Alternatively, the value of the first length field is the sum of the value of the third length field and the value of the third start field.

Optionally, the SL transmission end symbols in the slots indicated by each set of the start field and the length field are the same. For example, the in-slot SL transmission end symbol indicated by the first start field and the first length field is the same as the in-slot SL transmission end symbol indicated by the second start field and the second length field. For another example, the first start field and the first length field indicate the same end symbol of the SL transmission in the slot as the third start field and the third length field. For another example, the second start field and the second length field indicate the same end symbol of the SL transmission in the slot as the third start field and the third length field.

Optionally, the time slots indicated by the N sets of start and length fields do not include time slots for transmission of SL-SSBs.

Method 2: the 1 set of start field and length field and the Q first fields indicate symbols used for transmission of SL information within a slot.

The first field (also understood as "1 st first field") indicates a start symbol in a slot for transmitting SL information. Optionally, the second AGC is located on a symbol of the second start field finger. Optionally, the PSSCH and/or PSCCH is mapped starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the second start field. Optionally, the SL information carried on the second AGC symbol is a copy of the SL information carried on the PSSCH and/or PSCCH first symbol. Optionally, the SL information includes at least one of PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS and CSI-RS. Optionally, the mapping of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the second start field may also be understood as: the SL information is transmitted starting from the second AGC symbol.

The first field (also understood as "the 2 nd first field") indicates a start symbol in a slot for transmitting SL information. Optionally, the third AGC is located on a symbol of the third start field finger. Optionally, the PSSCH and/or PSCCH is mapped starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the third start field. Optionally, the SL information carried on the third AGC symbol is a copy of the SL information carried on the PSSCH and/or PSCCH first symbol. Optionally, the SL information includes at least one of PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS and CSI-RS. Optionally, the mapping of the PSSCH and/or PSCCH starting from the first symbol after the symbol indicated by the third start field may also be understood as: the transmission of SL information starts with the third AGC symbol.

Optionally, the time slot does not include a time slot for transmission of the SL-SSB.

The above description describes a method for determining the number and location of the second AGC, and in particular describes the content transmitted on the second AGC symbol, including a method for determining SL information transmitted on the second AGC, starting with the first AGC; or, starting to transmit SL information from the ith symbol, and determining the SL information transmitted on the jth symbol, where the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sideline information, and j is at least any integer greater than or equal to i and less than or equal to 14.

In a possible implementation, the terminal device starts transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from a second AGC symbol (i.e., a second symbol), which is the content of the first symbol of the duplicate PSCCH/PSSCH.

In a possible implementation, the terminal device starts transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from a first AGC symbol (i.e., a first symbol) and the second AGC symbol is used to map the PSCCH/PSSCH. That is, the second AGC symbol belongs to the number of symbols used to calculate the transport block size.

In such an implementation, the receiving terminal device needs to determine whether the transmitting terminal device is transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or from the second AGC symbol.

Wherein, the transmission of PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol is also understood to be the transmission of PSCCH/PSSCH from the first symbol after the first AGC symbol. The transmission of PSCCH/PSSCH from the second AGC symbol may also be understood as starting from the first symbol after the second AGC symbol.

Alternatively, for a transmitting terminal device transmitting the PSCCH/PSSCH starting from a first AGC symbol, the receiving terminal device does not adjust the AGC at a second AGC symbol. The receiving terminal device not adjusting the AGC at the second AGC symbol may also be understood as the receiving terminal device adjusting the AGC at the first AGC symbol.

Since the second AGC symbol is used to carry the PSCCH/PSSCH, the receiving terminal device needs to determine whether the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting the PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or from the second AGC symbol based on some condition.

Optionally, for the transmitting terminal device to transmit the PSCCH/PSSCH starting with the second AGC symbol, the receiving terminal device adjusts the AGC at the first AGC symbol and/or the second AGC symbol.

Next, in connection with fig. 15 to 17, how the receiving terminal device determines whether the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or from the second AGC symbol will be described. The method described in fig. 15 to 17 is a specific implementation of the method 1000 in which the receiving terminal device determines the time domain position of the start symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information.

Method 1: the receiving terminal device judges whether the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or from the second AGC symbol according to the PSCCH decoding result.

First, a frequency domain location determination method of PSCCH is explained: the PSCCH and PSSCH are transmitted in a RBs set. Wherein the PSCCH comprises B frequency domain units, and the PSSCH comprises C frequency domain units. The frequency domain unit is at least any one of a subchannel and/or an interlace. Alternatively, the RB with the smallest index of the frequency domain unit of the PSCCH is the RB with the smallest index of the mapped psch. Optionally, the RB with the smallest index includes an RB with the smallest index in the index-smallest RB set. Optionally, the RB with the smallest index includes an RB with the smallest index in the frequency domain unit with the smallest index. Alternatively, the RB with the smallest index does not include RBs belonging to the guard band. Wherein the PSSCH is a PSSCH scheduled by the PSCCH. Alternatively, the smallest index of the sub-channels that map the PSSCH is the sub-channel index that maps the PSCCH. The sub-channel may be a sub-channel of consecutive RBs or a sub-channel of discrete RBs. For example, the smallest index among sub-channels (discrete RBs) to which the PSCCH is mapped is the sub-channel (continuous RB) index to which the PSCCH is mapped.

Alternatively, the PSCCH decoding result may also be understood as the decoding result of the first-order SCI.

Secondly, the time domain position determining method of the PSCCH is explained:

alternatively, as shown in fig. 15, the sl-StartSymbol and/or the first field can indicate the starting position of the mapped PSCCH. When the position of the second AGC symbol is a fixed value, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is sl-StartSymbol, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is a symbol corresponding to the fixed value. When the first field indicates the position of the second ACG symbol, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is sl-StartSymbol plus the symbol corresponding to the first field, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol corresponding to the first field.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 15, the sl-StartSymbol and/or the first field can indicate the starting position of the mapped PSCCH. When the position of the second AGC symbol is a fixed value, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol next to the sl-StartSymbol indication symbol, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol next to the symbol corresponding to the fixed value. When the first field indicates the position of the second ACG symbol, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is sl-startsymbol+1 plus the symbol corresponding to the first field, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the next symbol of the symbol corresponding to the first field.

The PSCCH occasion may be determined after the start location of the PSCCH is determined based on the PSCCH start location and the number of symbols of the PSCCH, where the number of symbols of the PSCCH may be pre-configured or network configured.

Optionally, the PSCCH occasions comprise a first PSCCH occasion and/or a second PSCCH occasion. Wherein the first PSCCH occasion may begin at a first symbol after the first AGC symbol; the second PSCCH occasion may begin at the first symbol after the second AGC symbol. In fig. 15 (a), the first PSCCH timing is represented by symbols 1 and 2, and in fig. 15 (b), the second PSCCH timing is represented by symbols 8 and 9.

The receiving terminal device can determine whether the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting PSCCH/PSCCH from the first AGC symbol or from the second AGC symbol by determining whether a PSCCH is present on the first PSCCH occasion.

Alternatively, the receiving terminal apparatus may determine that the PSCCH exists on the first PSCCH occasion by the following method. For example, the SL information carried on the first PSCCH occasion, on which there is a PSCCH, passes the CRC check. For another example, the RSRP measured value of the SL information carried on the first PSCCH occasion on which the PSCCH is located is greater than or equal to the preset threshold. For another example, SCI carried on a first PSCCH occasion on which a PSCCH is present is decoded.

Alternatively, the receiving terminal device may determine that there is no PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion by the following method. For example, the SL information carried on the first PSCCH occasion fails the CRC check and there is no PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion. For another example, the RSRP measurement of the SL information carried on the first PSCCH occasion is less than a preset threshold, and there is no PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion. For another example, the RSSI measurements of the SL information carried on the first PSCCH occasion are less than a preset threshold, and there is no PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion. For another example, when the SCI carried on the first PSCCH occasion is not decoded, there is no PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion.

Alternatively, in the above procedure, the SL information may be PSCCH and/or SCI.

When the receiving terminal device determines that there is a PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion, it may be determined that the transmitting terminal device is transmitting PSCCH/PSCCH from the first AGC symbol, and the receiving terminal device decodes the PSCCH on the second AGC symbol. When the receiving terminal device determines that there is no PSCCH on the first PSCCH occasion, it may determine that the transmitting terminal device is transmitting PSCCH/PSCCH from the second AGC symbol, and the receiving terminal device may adjust AGC on the second AGC symbol.

Wherein the PSCCH occasion may be a first time range, a second time range, or a third time range in method 1000.

The receiving terminal device judges whether the transmitting terminal device starts to transmit PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or PSCCH/PSSCH from the second AGC symbol according to the decoding result of the demodulation reference signal DMRS

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 16, the sl-StartSymbol and/or the first field can indicate the starting position of the mapped PSCCH. When the position of the second AGC symbol is a fixed value, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is sl-StartSymbol, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is a symbol corresponding to the fixed value. When the first field indicates the position of the second ACG symbol, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is sl-StartSymbol plus the symbol corresponding to the first field, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol corresponding to the first field.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 16, the sl-StartSymbol and/or the first field can indicate the starting position of the mapped PSCCH. When the position of the second AGC symbol is a fixed value, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol next to the sl-StartSymbol indication symbol, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol next to the symbol corresponding to the fixed value. When the first field indicates the position of the second ACG symbol, the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is sl-startsymbol+1 plus the symbol corresponding to the first field, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the next symbol of the symbol corresponding to the first field.

In fig. 16, the terminal device can determine whether the transmitting terminal device starts transmission of PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or the second AGC symbol by determining whether DMRS is mapped on at least one of the symbols {1,2,3 }. Wherein the DMRS comprises PSCCH-DMRS and/or PSSCH-DMRS. Wherein PSCCH-DMRS is mapped on PSCCH and PSSCH-DMRS is mapped on PSSCH.

Alternatively, the terminal device may determine that the DMRS is mapped on at least any one of the symbols {1,2,3} by, for example, decoding the DMRS on the symbol that has the DMRS on the symbol. For another example, when a spectral peak occurs as a result of correlation between SL information carried on the symbol and the local DMRS, the symbol has the DMRS. For another example, when the correlation result between the SL information carried on the symbol and the local DMRS shows a spectral peak, and the value of the spectral peak is greater than or equal to a preset threshold, the symbol has the DMRS.

When the receiving terminal device determines that there is a DMRS on at least any one of the symbols {1,2,3}, it can be determined that the transmitting terminal device is transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol, the receiving terminal device decodes the PSSCH on the second AGC symbol, and when the receiving terminal device determines that there is no DMRS on at least any one of the symbols {1,2,3}, it can be determined that the transmitting terminal device is transmitting PSCCH/PSSCH from the second AGC symbol, and the receiving terminal device can adjust AGC on the second AGC symbol.

It should be appreciated that the 1,2,3 interval is merely exemplary, and that the interval may be any number of symbols between the first AGC symbol and the second AGC symbol, alternatively the interval may be a first time range, a second time range, or a third time range in the method 1000.

In the above process, the generator of the DMRS is represented by c _init Initializing the method comprises the following steps: wherein the generated initialization C of the DMRS _init May be a fixed value. During the initialization process, the fixed N can be used _ID Generating C _init 。

Method 3: the receiving terminal device judges whether the transmitting terminal device starts to transmit PSCCH/PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or the second AGC symbol according to the decoding result of the demodulation reference signal DMRS.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 17, in the method, the position of the second AGC symbol is a fixed value, and the start position of the mapped PSCCH is a symbol corresponding to the fixed value. Optionally, for the first field indicating the position of the second AGC symbol, the start position of the mapping PSCCH is sl-StartSymbol plus the symbol corresponding to the first field. That is, regardless of whether the terminal apparatus starts transmitting SL information from the first AGC symbol or starts transmitting SL information from the second AGC symbol, the start position of the mapped PSCCH is SL-StartSymbol plus the symbol corresponding to the first field; either all of the symbols are symbols corresponding to the fixed value, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the symbol corresponding to the first field.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 17, in the method, for the second AGC symbol position to be a fixed value, the start position of the mapped PSCCH is the next symbol of the symbol to which the fixed value corresponds. Optionally, for the first field indicating the position of the second AGC symbol, the start position of the mapping PSCCH is sl-startsymbol+1 plus the symbol corresponding to the first field. That is, regardless of whether the terminal apparatus starts transmitting SL information from the first AGC symbol or starts transmitting SL information from the second AGC symbol, the start position of the mapped PSCCH is SL-startsymbol+1 plus the symbol corresponding to the first field; either all of the symbols are symbols corresponding to the fixed value, or the starting position of the mapped PSCCH is the next symbol of the symbols corresponding to the first field.

In fig. 17 (a), the transmitting terminal apparatus starts SL transmission at symbol 0, PSCCH maps DMRS to symbols 8 and 9, and symbols 1 and 2, and in fig. 17 (b), the transmitting terminal apparatus starts SL transmission at symbol 0, PSCCH maps no DMRS to symbols 8 and 9, and symbols 1 and 2.

The terminal device can determine whether the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting the PSSCH from the first AGC symbol or the second AGC symbol by determining whether the DMRS is mapped on at least any one of the symbols {1,2,3 }. The DMRS includes PSSCH-DMRS. Wherein the PSSCH-DMRS is mapped on the PSSCH. (absence of PSCCH-DMRS)

Optionally, the method for determining that the DMRS exists by the terminal device is at least any one of the following methods. For example, when decoding the DMRS on the symbol, the symbol has the DMRS. For another example, when a spectral peak occurs as a result of correlation between SL information carried on the symbol and the local DMRS, the symbol has the DMRS. For another example, when the correlation result between the SL information carried on the symbol and the local DMRS shows a spectral peak, and the value of the spectral peak is greater than or equal to a preset threshold, the symbol has the DMRS.

Optionally, the method for determining that the DMRS is not present by the terminal device is at least any one of the following methods. For example, when decoding the DMRS on the symbol, the symbol has no DMRS. For another example, as a result of correlation between SL information carried on the symbol and the local DMRS, no spectral peak occurs, and no DMRS is present on the symbol. For another example, when the correlation result of the SL information carried on the symbol and the local DMRS shows a spectral peak, but the value of the spectral peak is smaller than the preset threshold, the symbol has no DMRS.

When the receiving terminal apparatus determines that the PSSCH-DMRS is present on at least any one of the determined symbols {1,2,3}, it can be judged that the transmitting terminal apparatus starts transmitting the PSSCH from the first AGC symbol, and at this time, the receiving terminal apparatus can decode the PSSCH on the second AGC symbol. When the receiving terminal apparatus determines that there is no PSSCH-DMRS on at least any one of the symbols {1,2,3}, it may be judged that the transmitting terminal apparatus starts transmitting the PSSCH from the second AGC symbol, and at this time, the receiving terminal apparatus may adjust AGC on the second AGC symbol.

In this embodiment of the present invention, the receiving terminal device may determine whether to decode the PSCCH or perform AGC adjustment at the second AGC symbol position by determining whether the transmitting terminal device starts to transmit the PSCCH/PSCCH from the first AGC symbol or from the second AGC symbol according to the PSCCH or DMRS decoding result, and in this way, it may enable effective SL information to be transmitted on the second AGC symbol instead of duplicate content, and may enable more resources to be used for mapping the PSCCH, so as to increase transmission capacity and increase system capacity.

The method for determining the time domain position of the PSCCH in the time slot is described below.

The PSCCH is mapped in this way mainly to reduce the number of blind tests of the PSCCH. The transmitting terminal device starts transmitting the sidestream information at a first AGC symbol, and maps PSCCH after the first AGC symbol; the transmission of side-line information begins at the second AGC symbol, after which the PSCCH is mapped. The receiving terminal device does not know the location where the transmitting terminal device starts transmitting side line information. It is therefore necessary to decode the PSCCH in at least 2 corresponding positions as described above. In contrast, if the transmitting UE starts transmitting side row information at either the first AGC symbol or the second AGC symbol, the PSCCH is mapped after the second AGC symbol or after the last second AGC symbol. The receiving terminal device only needs to decode the PSCCH at the 1 respective positions. The blind detection times of PSCCH are reduced, and the hardware overhead of a receiving terminal device is reduced.

Method 4: the mapping rule or CB concatenation rule is changed.

(1) Altering mapping rules

Fig. 18 is a more specific implementation of the methods 1000-1300 in which side row data information is mapped according to symbol indexes and then according to resource unit indexes.

As shown in fig. 18, for mapping of the PSSCH, bits of the PSSCH are mapped onto Virtual Resource Blocks (VRBs) in ascending order of the symbol index i and then the RE index k.

Optionally, the mapping of the PSSCH includes a mapping of bits of the second order SCI and/or a mapping of bits of the PSSCH that do not include the second order SCI.

(2) Altering CB concatenation rules

Fig. 19 is a more specific implementation of the methods 1000-1300 in which the sidelink data information is mapped according to the intra-code block index and then according to the resource unit index.

As shown in fig. 19, in the conventional method, CB blocks are concatenated in such a way that bit indexes in the code blocks are ascending and then bit indexes r are ascending.

The method provided by the embodiment of the application can cascade the CB blocks according to the method of ascending the index r of the code block and then ascending the index of the bit in the code block.

For example, the bit sequence of the CB concatenated block includes frk where frk is the k bit sequence of the r-th code block CB (CB). For example, the 0 th CB includes { f ₀₀ ,f ₀₁ ,f ₀₂ ,f ₀₃ CB 1. It includes { f } ₁₀ ,f ₁₁ ,f ₁₂ ,f ₁₃ CB 2 comprises { f ₂₀ ,f ₂₁ ,f ₂₂ ,f ₂₃ }. In CB concatenation, a CB concatenation block is a bit sequence g= { f ₀₀ ,f ₁₀ ,f ₂₀ ,f ₀₁ ,f ₁₁ ,f ₂₁ ,f ₀₂ ,f ₁₂ ,f ₂₂ ,f ₀₃ ,f ₁₃ ,f ₂₃ }。

Table 7 below presents a comparison between the prior art method and the specific implementation of the method provided in the examples of the present application.

TABLE 7

The method of copying SL transmission information on the second AGC symbol is described below. The method is a more specific implementation of method 1200 and method 1300.

In a possible implementation, the RE of the second AGC symbol is the RE of the first symbol after the duplicated second AGC symbol, or the RE of the second AGC symbol is the RE of the last symbol before the duplicated second AGC symbol, or the RE of the second AGC symbol is the RE of the duplicated kth symbol, where k belongs to any one of {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13 }. Wherein the value of k may be pre-configured or network configured. The first symbol after the second AGC symbol, the last symbol before the second AGC symbol, or the kth symbol is at least any one of PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS, or CSI-RS, which is carried on the replicated symbol. The REs of the second AGC symbol are copies of the corresponding content in at least any one of the PSCCH, PSSCH, DM-RS, PT-RS or CSI-RS carried on the kth symbol. That is, the information carried on the second AGC symbol and the kth symbol is exactly the same.

Since the method in fig. 14 to 17 is used to determine whether there is a PSCCH after the first AGC symbol, which requires processing time, some terminal devices have slower processing speed, and may not be able to determine whether there is a PSCCH after the first AGC symbol when it occurs in the second AGC symbol. In this way, the terminal apparatus cannot determine whether to continue decoding according to the PSCCH or the PSSCH.

In the embodiment of the present invention, the data on the other symbols is copied on the second AGC symbol instead of the mapping data, and in this way, the terminal device with a slower processing speed can quickly decode according to the content of the second AGC symbol.

A more specific implementation of the method 1200 and method 1300 for counting the first number of symbols is described below.

In a specific embodiment, the AGC symbols may include a first AGC symbol and a second AGC symbol. The first AGC symbol may also be referred to as a first replica symbol, and the first ACG symbol may be a first symbol of a slot indicated by sl-StartSymbol. The second AGC symbol may also be referred to as a second replica symbol or an additional AGC symbol, which is located differently in the time slot than the first AGC symbol.

The specific implementation and examples of method 1 and method 2 above are the same as those of the method of preconfiguring AGC symbols and positions in fig. 14, and will not be repeated here.

The above description describes a method for determining the number and location of the second AGC, and the following details are specifically described for the content transmitted on the second AGC symbol:

In determining the TBS, the terminal device needs to know the first number of symbols in the slot. The terminal device determines the number of REs allocated for PSSCH according to the following method/>

Optionally, the RE number is N 'of RE number allocated for PSSCH on each RB in the slot' _RE . Wherein,the first symbol number in the time slot; / >Is the number of subcarriers in RB; />For PSFCH symbol overhead in a slot, e.g., 0 or 3 symbols, indicated by a combination of higher layer signaling and SCI signaling; />Overhead for DMRS, e.g., {12,15,18,21,24} REs, is indicated by higher layers; />For other overheads, e.g., CSI-RS, pt=rs overheads, e.g., {0,3,6,9} symbols, are indicated by higher layers. Optionally, the first number of symbols is a number of symbols to which the PSSCH may be mapped. For example, a->When PSSCH is mapped in slot, symbol number is +.>When PSSCH is mapped in slot, symbol number is +.>

Optionally, a second field is included in the SCI. The second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting SL information, or the second field indicates the number of symbols for transmitting SL information, or the second field indicates a start symbol for transmitting SL information.

Optionally, the terminal device determines the first time according to the second fieldFirst number of symbols in slotThe first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

Tables 8, 9, 10, 11 illustrate the first number of symbolsRelationship to the value of the second field. Each row of data in each table can be in parallel relation, can be used independently, and each table can be in or relation with each other or can be used respectively.

For example, 2 SL access symbols (i.e., 2 AGC symbols) are included in a slot. For transmission of SL information starting from the first AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a first value; for transmission of SL information starting from the second AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a second value.

For example, 3 SL access symbols (i.e., 3 AGC symbols) are included in a slot. For transmission of SL information starting from the first AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a first value; for transmission of SL information starting from the second AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a second value; for transmission of SL information starting from the third AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a third value.

For example, 3 SL access symbols (i.e., 3 AGC symbols) are included in a slot. For transmission of SL information starting from the first AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a first value; for transmission of SL information starting from the 1 st second AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a second value; for transmission of SL information starting from the 2 nd second AGC symbol, the value of the second field is a third value.

Optionally, 2 SL access symbols are included in the slot. For a value of the second field being a first value,equal to Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; for the second field the value is a second value, < > >Equal to Len ₂ -X-1、Len ₁ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-1、Len-S ₂ -X-1、Len–S ₁ Any one of' -X-1. The meaning of the symbols is shown in table 8, where table 8 is the first number of symbols q=1 or n=2 (e.g., the second field is the field in SCI).

Optionally, 3 SL access symbols are included in the slot. For a value of the second field being a first value,equal to Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ ’-X-3、Len-X-3、Len-S ₁ -X-3、Len–S ₀ Any one of' -X-3; for the second field the value is a second value, < >>Equal to Len ₂ -X-2、Len ₁ ’-X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-2、Len-S ₂ -X-2、Len–S ₁ Any one of' -X-2; for the second field the value is a third value, < >>Equal to Len ₃ -X-1、Len ₂ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₃ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ ’-X-1、Len-S ₃ -X-1、Len–S ₂ Any one of' -X-1. The meaning of the symbols is shown in table 9, table 9 being the first number of symbols q=2 or n=3 (e.g. the second field is the field in SCI).

Where X is the number of symbols of a GAP in a slot, a GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, and a GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1.

TABLE 8

TABLE 9

Optionally, a second field is configured or preconfigured, which is RRC or PC5-RRC signaling. The second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting SL information, or the second field indicates the number of symbols for transmitting SL information, or the second field indicates a start symbol for transmitting SL information.

Tables 8, 9, 10, 11 illustrate the first number of symbols Relationship to the value of the second field. Each row of data in each table can be in parallel relation, can be used independently, and each table can be in relation or respectively.

Optionally, 2 SL access symbols are included in the slot. For a value of the second field being a first value,equal to Len1-X-2, len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; for the second field the value is a second value, < >>Equal to 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any one of' +3) -X. The meaning of the symbols is shown in table 10, where table 10 is the first number of symbols q=1 or n=2 (e.g., the second field is a field in RRC).

Optionally, 3 SL access symbols are included in the slot. For a value of the second field being a first value,equal to Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ ’-X-3、Len-X-3、Len-S ₁ -X-3、Len–S ₀ Any one of' -X-3; for the second field the value is a second value, < >>Equal to 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ +S ₂ +5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₀ ’+S ₁ Any of' +5) -X; for the second field the value is a third value, < >>Equal to 0.5 x (Len ₁ +Len ₃ )–X-2、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₂ ’)–X-2、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₃ )–X-2、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ ’)-X-2、Len-0.5*(S ₁ +S ₃ )-X-2、Len-0.5*(S ₀ ’+S ₂ ') -X-2. The meaning of the symbols is shown in table 11, where table 11 is the first number of symbols q=2 or n=3 (e.g., the second field is a field in RRC).

Where X is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, GAP symbols may also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, and GAP symbols may also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1;

table 10

TABLE 11

It should be understood that a certain length field of tables 8 to 11 may be understood as a value indicated by a certain length field, and a certain start field may be understood as a value indicated by a certain start field. For example, len being the first Length field may be understood as Length being the value indicated by the first Length field, e.g., S ₁ Is the first start field can be understood as S ₁ Is the value indicated by the first start field.

When there are Q second AGC symbols in the preconfigured or network configured slot, where Q belongs to any one of {0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13}, the terminal device may determine the number of symbols to which PSSCH is mapped in the slot according to any one of the following methods.

Optionally, n=q+1, where Q is the number of second AGC symbols.

For example, the 1 st set of start and length fields includes a first start field and a first length field. For another example, the 2 nd set of start and length fields includes a second start field and a second length field. For another example, the 3 rd set of start and length fields includes a third start field and a third length field. Optionally, the symbol indicated by the first start field is a symbol where the first AGC is located. Optionally, the symbol indicated by the second start field is a symbol where the second AGC is located, and/or the 1 st symbol where the second AGC is located. Optionally, the symbol indicated by the third start field is a symbol where the second AGC is located, and/or the symbol where the 2 nd second AGC is located. Optionally, the symbols of the duplicate PSFCH do not belong to the second AGC symbol

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Where X is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, the GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field. Wherein Len may be sl-LengthSymbiols, and the first symbol number may be a symbol number mapped to PSSCH.

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy->

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following condition Or satisfy->

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the ith AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Wherein the value range of i belongs to an integer from 1 to N; x is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, and GAP symbols can also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of the second AGC symbols, or Q is the number of the second AGC symbols; len (Len) _i The number of symbols indicated for the i-th length field. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is a 1 st AGC symbol in the slot, and the second AGC symbol is a 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, and the i-1 st second AGC symbol in the time slot is the i-th AGC symbol in the time slot.

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the 2 nd AGC symbol is located at symbol 4, the second length field is an indication10 symbols. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following condition Or satisfy->For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>Or satisfy->

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the 2 nd AGC symbol is located in symbol 4, and the second length field indicates 10 symbols; the 3 rd AGC symbol is located at symbol 8 and the third length field is an indication of 6 symbols. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy->For another example, for a terminal device to begin transmitting SL information in the 2 nd AGC symbol of a slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 3 rd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>Or satisfy->

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the second AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Where X is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, the GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len' is the number of symbols indicated by the second length field.

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The second AGC symbol is located at symbol 4 and the second length field is indicative of 10 symbols. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the second AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfiesOr satisfy->

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the ith second AGC symbol in the slot, the number of first symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Wherein the value range of i belongs to an integer from 1 to Q, or the value range of i belongs to an integer from 0 to Q; x is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, and GAP symbols can also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC after the symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len (Len) _i ' is the number of symbols indicated by the ith second length field. Wherein the 0 th second AGC symbol can also be understood as the first AGC symbol. Alternatively, the number of symbols indicated by the i-th second length field may also be understood as the number Len of symbols indicated by the i+1th length field _i +1, i.e. Len _i ’＝Len _i +1。

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The first AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the second AGC symbol is located at symbol 4 and the second length field is indicative of 10 symbols. Alternatively, the second length field may also be understood as the 1 st second length field. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy->For another example, for a terminal device to start transmitting SL information in a second AGC symbol (e.g., the 1 st second AGC symbol) in a slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies + ->Or satisfy->

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The first AGC symbol is located at the symbol0, the first length field indicating 14 symbols; the 1 st second AGC symbol is located in symbol 4, and the 1 st second length field indicates 10 symbols; the 2 nd second AGC symbol is located at symbol 8 and the 2 nd second length field is indicative of 6 symbols. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy->For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st second AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +. >Or satisfy->For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd second AGC symbol in the time slot, the first number of symbols in the time slot satisfiesOr satisfy->

In several possible embodiments described above, the relationship of the first AGC symbol, the first second AGC symbol, and the second AGC symbol in the time slot may be as shown in fig. 20.

Method 2:1 set of start field and length field and Q first fields indicate symbols for transmission of SL information in a slot

For example, 1 set of start field and length field includes a first start field and a first length field. For another example, the first field indicates the location of the second AGC symbol within the time slot. For example, the first field S indicates that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol S in the slot, or, the ith first field S _i Indicating that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol S in the slot _i . For another example, the Q first fields respectively indicate the locations of the Q second AGC symbols within the slot. Optionally, the symbol indicated by the first start field is a symbol where the first AGC is located. Optionally, the first start field and/or the symbol indicated by the first field is a symbol where the second AGC is located. Optionally, the first start field and/or the symbol indicated by the ith first field is the symbol where the ith second AGC is located. Wherein i belongs to any integer from 1 to Q.

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Where X is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, the GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field.

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. Time slot for terminal deviceStarting transmission of SL information with 1 AGC symbol, the first number of symbols in a slot is as followsOr satisfy- >

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the ith AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Wherein the value range of i belongs to an integer from 1 to N; x is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, and GAP symbols can also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of the second AGC symbols, or Q is the number of the second AGC symbols; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field; s is S _i Symbol index indicated for the ith start field, e.g. S ₁ Symbol index indicated for the first start field, e.g. S ₂ Symbol index indicated for the second start field, e.g. S ₃ The symbol index indicated for the third start field, for example, SN is the symbol index indicated for the nth start field. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is a 1 st AGC symbol in the slot, and the second AGC symbol is a 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, and the i-1 st second AGC symbol in the time slot is the i-th AGC symbol in the time slot.

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the first field indicates that the 2 nd AGC symbol is located at symbol 4. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the time slotThe first symbol number satisfies Or satisfy->For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>Or satisfy->

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the 1 st first field indicates that the 2 nd AGC symbol is located at symbol 4; the 2 nd first field indicates that the 3 rd AGC symbol is located at symbol 8. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy-> For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>Or satisfy->As another example of this, for example,for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 3 rd AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies +. >Or satisfy->

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the second AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Where X is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, the GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field; s is S _i Index indicating AGC symbol, e.g. S ₁ Symbol index indicating the indication of the first start field, e.g. S ₁ ' indicates the symbol index indicated by the first field. Optionally, the symbol index S indicated by the first field ₁ ' it can also be understood that the symbol index S indicated by the second start field ₂ S, i.e ₁ ’＝S ₂ 。

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The first start field indicates symbol 0, and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol 4. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the second AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies Or satisfy the following

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the ith second AGC symbol in the slot, the number of first symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy-> Wherein the value range of i belongs to an integer from 1 to Q, or the value range of i belongs to an integer from 0 to Q; x is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, and GAP symbols can also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC after the symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; s is S ₁ A symbol index indicating a first start field indication; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field; s is S _i ' sign index indicating the ith first field indication, e.g. S ₁ ' sign index indicating 1 st first field indication, e.g. S ₂ ' indicates the symbol index indicated by the 2 nd first field. Wherein the 0 th second AGC symbol can also be understood as the first AGC symbol. Alternatively, the symbol index Si' indicated by the i-th first field can also be understood as the symbol index S where the i+1th AGC is located _i +1, i.e. S _i ’＝S _i +1。

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The first AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the first field indicates that the second AGC symbol is located at symbol 4. Alternatively, the second length field may also be understood as the 1 st second length field. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. Starting transmission of first AGC symbol in time slot for terminal deviceInputting SL information, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfiesOr satisfy-> For another example, for a terminal device to start transmitting SL information in a second AGC symbol (e.g., the 1 st second AGC symbol) in a slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies + ->Or satisfy->

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The first AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the 1 st first field indicates that the 1 st second AGC symbol is located at symbol 4 and the 2 nd first field indicates that the 2 nd second AGC symbol is located at symbol 8. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy->For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st second AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +. >Or satisfy-> For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd second AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies +.>Or satisfy->/>

Method 3:1 set of start field and length field and Q first fields indicate symbols for transmission of SL information in a slot

For example, the 1 st set of start and length fields includes a first start field and a first length field. Optionally, the symbol indicated by the first start field is a symbol where the first AGC is located.

For another example, the first field indicates a spacing of the second AGC symbol from the first AGC symbol within the time slot. Optionally, the first start field and the symbol indicated by the first field are symbols in which the second AGC is located.

For another example, Q first fields respectively indicate the spacing of Q second AGC symbols from the first AGC symbol, respectively, within a slot. Optionally, the first start field and the symbol indicated by the ith first field are symbols in which the ith second AGC is located. Wherein i belongs to any integer from 1 to Q.

Optionally, the symbol of the duplicate PSFCH does not belong to the second AGC symbol.

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionOr satisfy- >

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the ith AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Wherein the value range of i belongs to an integer from 1 to N; x is the number of GAP symbols in the slot, the GAP symbols can also be understood as not transmittedThe sign of SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of the second AGC symbols, or Q is the number of the second AGC symbols; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field; s is S _i Indicating the spacing of the ith AGC symbol from the symbol indicated by the first start field, e.g. S ₁ Indicating the interval between the 1 st AGC symbol and the first AGC symbol (interval value is 0), for example S ₂ Indicating the spacing of the 2 nd AGC symbol from the first AGC symbol, e.g., S ₃ Indicating the spacing of the 3 rd AGC symbol from the first AGC symbol. Alternatively S _i Indicated by a first field of values of (c). Optionally, the first AGC symbol is a 1 st AGC symbol in the slot, and the second AGC symbol is a 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, and the i-1 st second AGC symbol in the time slot is the i-th AGC symbol in the time slot.

Optionally, the interval S indicated by the first field _i Is the interval between the starting position of the first AGC symbol and the starting position of the second AGC symbol; alternatively, the interval S indicated by the first field _i Is the interval between the end position of the first AGC symbol and the end position of the second AGC symbol. For the interval s between the end position of the first AGC symbol and the start position of the second AGC symbol _i Satisfy S _i ＝s _i +1。

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the first field indicates that the 2 nd AGC symbol is located at symbol 4. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionFor another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The 1 st AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the 1 st first field indicates that the 2 nd AGC symbol is located at symbol 4; the 2 nd first field indicates that the 3 rd AGC symbol is located at symbol 8. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following condition For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>For another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 3 rd AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies +.>

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the second AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Where X is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, the GAP symbol may also be understood as a symbol that does not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field; s is S ₁ ' is the interval of the first AGC symbol and the second AGC symbol indicated by the first start field. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is the 1 st AGC symbol in the time slot, and the second AGC symbol is the 2 nd AG in the time slotAnd C is marked.

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The first start field indicates symbol 0, and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the first AGC symbol indicated by the first field is spaced 4 symbols apart from the second AGC symbol. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the second AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies

In one possible implementation, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the ith second AGC symbol in the slot, the number of first symbols in the slot satisfiesOr satisfy->Wherein the value range of i belongs to an integer from 1 to Q, or the value range of i belongs to an integer from 0 to Q; x is the number of symbols of GAP in a slot, and GAP symbols can also be understood as symbols that do not transmit SL information, e.g., x=0 or x=1; n is the number of the initial fields, and/or N is the number of the length fields, and/or N is the number of the AGC symbols in the time slot; q is the number of symbols of the second AGC after the symbols of the second AGC, or Q is the number of the second AGC; len is the number of symbols indicated by the first length field; s is S ₀ ' indicate the interval of the first AGC symbol from the symbol indicated by the first start field (interval value is 0); s is S _i Indicating the ith second AGC symbol and the first start field fingerSpacing of symbols shown, e.g. S ₁ ' indicates the spacing of the 1 st second AGC symbol from the first AGC symbol, again e.g., S ₂ ' indicates the spacing of the 2 nd second AGC symbol from the first AGC symbol. Alternatively S _i The first field of the' value indicates. Optionally, the 0 th second AGC symbol is the first AGC symbol. Optionally, spacing S of the ith second AGC symbol from the symbol indicated by the first start field _i ' it can also be understood that the interval S between the symbol where the (i+1) th AGC is located and the symbol indicated by the first start field _i +1, i.e. S _i ’＝S _i +1。

For example, there are n=2 AGC symbols in a slot. The first AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the first AGC symbol indicated by the first field is spaced 4 symbols apart from the second AGC symbol. Q=n-1=1 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following condition For another example, for a terminal device to start transmitting SL information in a second AGC symbol (e.g., the 1 st second AGC symbol) in a slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfies + ->

As another example, there are n=3 AGC symbols in a slot. The first AGC symbol is located at symbol 0 and the first length field indicates 14 symbols; the interval between the first AGC symbol indicated by the 1 st first field and the 1 st second AGC symbol is 4 symbols; first AGC symbol indicated by the 2 nd first field and 2 ndThe second AGC symbols are spaced 8 symbols apart. Q=n-1=2 is satisfied. For the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the first AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies the following conditionFor another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 1 st second AGC symbol in the slot, the first number of symbols in the slot satisfiesFor another example, for the terminal device to start transmitting SL information in the 2 nd second AGC symbol in the time slot, the first symbol number in the time slot satisfies +.>

In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may determine the number of symbols of the transmission side control information and/or the side data information in the slot according to the value of the second field, and after determining the number of symbols mapped to the PSSCH in the slot, the terminal device may determine the TBS based on the number of symbols of the PSSCH.

In a possible implementation, taking the second AGC symbol as symbol 7, taking DMRS located in symbols 1, 4, 7, and 10 (see table 1 for details) as an example, the receiving terminal device cannot receive the DMRS on the symbol 7 if it adjusts AGC. This has an impact on channel estimation and decoding. The above effect can be avoided by not mapping DMRS on the second AGC symbol.

Optionally, the DMRS is PSSCH-DMRS.

The following describes in detail how to avoid the impact on channel estimation and decoding, and the method can be applied to the methods 1000 to 1300.

Method 1: use of DMRS time domain patterns that do not map DMRS on AGC symbols

All shown in columns 2 to 7 of Table 1 are DMRSTime domain patterns, e.g. Etc. The first terminal device determines a DMRS time domain pattern from the DMRS time domain pattern list and the AGC symbol. Optionally, the symbol in which the DMRS is mapped does not include an AGC symbol.

Optionally, AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a and symbol b, where a is less than b. The values of a and b belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a and b belong to integers from 1 to 14. For the start of transmission of SL information at symbol a, the terminal device uses the following conditionsDMRS time domain pattern of (a). />

Optionally, AGC symbols in a slot are symbol a, symbol b, and symbol c, where a is less than b and b is less than c. a. The values of b and c belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a, b and c belong to integers from 1 to 14. For starting transmission of SL information at symbol a, the terminal device uses the following conditions DMRS time domain pattern of (a); for starting transmission of SL information at symbol b, the terminal device usage satisfies +.>DMRS time domain pattern of (a).

Optionally, AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a, symbol b, symbol c, and symbol d, where a is less than b, b is less than c, and c is less than d. a. The values of b, c and d belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a, b, c and d belong to integers from 1 to 14. For starting transmission of SL information at symbol a, the terminal device uses the following conditions DMRS time domain pattern of (a); for starting transmission of SL information at symbol b, the terminal device usage satisfies +.> DMRS time domain pattern of (a); for starting transmission of SL information at symbol c, the terminal device usage satisfies +.>DMRS time domain pattern of (a).

It is to be appreciated that the DMRS time domain pattern described above may be the first time domain pattern or the second time domain pattern described in methods 1000-1300.

It should also be understood that, in this application, the DMRS time domain pattern, the first time domain position pattern, and the DMAR pattern have the same meaning and may be used interchangeably.

Method 2: if the DMRS is mapped on the AGC symbol, the DMRS is mapped on the adjacent symbol.

Alternatively, the method 2 may also be replaced by "if the DMRS is mapped on the AGC symbol, the symbol is Or symbol(s)DMRS is mapped. Wherein (1)>And->It can be understood that adjacent symbols to the AGC symbol, are +.>It can be understood that the jth symbol in method 1000 through method 1300Number (x).

Shown in columns 2 to 7 of Table 1 are all DMRS time domain patterns, e.g Etc. The first terminal device determines symbols mapped to the DMRS according to the DMRS time domain pattern and the AGC symbols. Optionally, for the symbol mapped with the DMRS including an AGC symbol, the first terminal device copies the DMRS on the AGC symbol to a first symbol before the AGC symbol or a first symbol after the AGC symbol.

Optionally, for the symbol mapped DMRS including an AGC symbol, the first terminal device maps the DMRS on the AGC symbol to a first symbol before the AGC symbol or a first symbol after the AGC symbol.

Optionally, AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a and symbol b, where a is less than b. The values of a and b belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a and b belong to integers from 1 to 14. The SL information is transmitted from symbol a, and the symbol mapping DMRS satisfiesThe terminal device handles the symbol->Is copied to the symbol->Or symbol->

Optionally, AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a and symbol b, where a is less than b. The values of a and b belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a and b belong to integers from 1 to 14. The SL information is transmitted from symbol a, and the symbol mapping DMRS satisfies The terminal device handles the symbol->DMRS mapping to symbol->Or symbol->

Optionally, AGC symbols in a slot are symbol a, symbol b, and symbol c, where a is less than b and b is less than c. a. The values of b and c belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a, b and c belong to integers from 1 to 14. For at least any one of the following cases, the terminal device signsIs copied to the symbol->Or symbol->Starting transmission of SL information at symbol a, symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>And/or +.>And/or starting transmission of SL information at symbol b, the symbol mapping DMRS satisfies

Optionally, AGC symbols in a slot are symbol a, symbol b, and symbol c, where a is less than b and b is less than c. a. The values of b and c belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a, b and c belong to integers from 1 to 14. For at least any one of the following casesHandle symbolDMRS mapping to symbol->Or symbol->Starting transmission of SL information at symbol a, symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>And/or +.>And/or starting transmission of SL information at symbol b, the symbol mapping DMRS satisfies

Optionally, AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a, symbol b, symbol c, and symbol d, where a is less than b, b is less than c, and c is less than d. a. The values of b, c and d belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a, b, c and d belong to integers from 1 to 14. For at least any one of the following cases, the terminal device signs Is copied to the symbol->Or symbol->Starting transmission of SL information at symbol a, symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>And/or +.>And/or starting transmission of SL information at symbol b, the symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>And/or +.>And/or starting transmission of SL information at symbol c, the symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>

Optionally, AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a, symbol b, symbol c, and symbol d, where a is less than b, b is less than c, and c is less than d. a. The values of b, c and d belong to integers from 0 to 13, or the values of a, b, c and d belong to integers from 1 to 14. For at least any one of the following cases, the terminal device signsDMRS mapping to symbol->Or symbol->Starting transmission of SL information at symbol a, symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>And/or +.>And/or starting transmission of SL information at symbol b, the symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>And/or +.>And/or starting transmission of SL information at symbol c, the symbol mapped DMRS satisfies +.>

Method 3: l (L) _d And/orExcluding the second AGC symbol

In the prior art, l _d The number of symbols of the mapped PSCCH/PSSCH that include AGC symbols within a slot. l (L) _d The value of (2) is any one of 6 to 13.The value of (1) is 0 to l _d At least any one of them. />The sign of (a) is the sign position indicated by the first start field. I.e. on a time slot with PSFCH, l _d 14-1-3=10; on a time slot without PSFCH, l _d 14-1=13.

Since multiple AGC in a slot is introduced, one approach is toThe indicated symbol does not comprise the second AGC symbol, another method is +.>The indicated symbols do not include AGC symbols within the slot. Correspondingly, l _d The included symbols also do not include the second AGC symbol or AGC symbols within the time slot.

Alternatively, l _d The symbols are the number of symbols which can be mapped to PSCCH/PSSCH and are remained after the first AGC symbol and/or the second AGC symbol are excluded, or _d The symbols are included as the number of symbols which can be mapped to PSCCH/PSSCH after excluding the AGC symbols, or/ _d The symbols included are the number of symbols that can be mapped to the PSCCH/PSSCH. Alternatively, the process may be carried out in a single-stage,the value range of (1) belongs to the number of [0,14-AGC symbols]Any integer of (2). Optionally, ->The symbol of (2) is the first symbol after the AGC symbol to start transmitting SL information, or +.>Is the first symbol after the first AGC symbol after starting transmission of SL information.

Alternatively, the process may be carried out in a single-stage,the indicated symbol index is the index value of the remaining symbols excluding the first AGC symbol and/or the second AGC symbol, or +>The indicated symbol index is the index value of the remaining symbols after excluding the AGC symbol. Optionally, - >The value range of (1) belongs to the number of [0,14-AGC symbols]Any integer of (2). Optionally, ->The symbol of (2) is the first symbol after the AGC symbol to start transmitting SL information, or +.>Is the first symbol after the first AGC symbol after starting transmission of SL information.

Method 4: DMRS position indicated by DMRS first time domain patternIs coincident with the second AGC symbol, position +.>Or symbol->To map symbols of DMRS.

DMRS position indicated by DMRS first time domain patternThe j-th symbol is also understood to be a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the DMRS, which coincides with the second AGC symbol. That is, the j-th symbol is the second AGC symbol, and the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the DMRS is the position +.>Is a symbol of (c).

Position ofOr symbol->To map the symbols of the DMRS, it can also be understood that the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are mapped demodulation reference signals. That is, the j+q ₁ The symbols are position->The symbols of j-q ₂ The symbols are position-> Is a symbol of (c).

As shown in fig. 21 (a) and (b), the second AGC symbol is at symbol 4, the first time domain pattern indicates that the symbol of the DMRS is {1,4,7,10}, and is actually mapped at symbol {1,5,7,10}. I.e. the first time domain pattern indicates at least one DMRS position Any one DMRS position->Is coincident with the second AGC symbol, position +.>Or position->To map symbols of DMRS. That is, the symbol actually mapped to the DMRS is different from the symbol of the DMRS indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern. The above case can also be understood as: according to DMRS symbol->And a second AGC symbol, the original DMRS first time domain pattern is interpreted as a new time domain pattern (i.e., a second time domain pattern).

Optionally, in the signOr symbol->Mapping DMRS symbols on PSSCH of (1) or, in the symbol + -> Or symbol->The DMRS symbols are mapped on the sub-channel where the PSSCH of (c) is located. That is, not in the symbol +.>Or symbol(s)Mapping DMRS symbols on PSCCH of (a) or not in symbol +.>Or symbol->The DMRS symbols are mapped on the sub-channels where the PSCCHs of (a) are located.

In one embodiment, the AGC symbols within a slot are symbol a and symbol b, where a is less than b.

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is symbol b, the DMRS symbol indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern is b, and the symbol mapped to the DMRS is b+q ₁ Or symbols b-q ₂ 。

Optionally, the first AGC symbol is symbol a, and the DMRS is a DMRS position indicated by the DMRS first time domain patternCoincident with the second AGC symbol, the symbol mapped to DMRS is +>Or +.>

Optionally, the first AGC symbol is symbol a, the second AGC symbol is symbol b, and the DMRS first time domain pattern indicates the DMRS position If it meets->The symbol mapped DMRS is +.>Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is +.>Alternatively, the symbol mapping DMRS is b+q ₁ Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is b-q ₂ 。

Alternatively, the second terminal apparatus may transmit SL information from the symbol a.

Wherein,the sign of (2) is the sign indicated by the first start field, i.e. +.>Is the first AGC symbol. The second start field or the first field indicates a first AGC symbol.

Wherein the value of a belongs to an integer from 0 to 13, or the value of a belongs to an integer from 1 to 14.

Wherein the value of b belongs to an integer from 0 to 13, or the value of b belongs to an integer from 1 to 14.

Wherein q ₁ The value of (2) is an integer from 0 to 14. For example q ₁ =1. For another example, q ₁ The value of (a) being indicated by the network device to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or q ₁ Is preconfigured to the first terminal device or the second terminal device, or q ₁ Is predefined.

Wherein q ₂ The value of (2) is an integer from 0 to 14. For example q ₂ =1. For another example, q ₂ The value of (a) being indicated by the network device to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or q ₂ The value is preconfigured to the first terminal device or the second terminal device, or q ₁ Is predefined.

Wherein the DMRS first time domain pattern may be indicated by SCI. For example, the SCI of the second terminal device is indicated to the first terminal device. The SCI is a first order SCI, which can be designated as SCI format 1-A.

For example, if the second AGC symbol is 4, the second terminal apparatus indicates that the symbol of the DMRS indicated by the first time domain pattern of DMRS is {1,4,7,10}, the second terminal apparatus maps the DMRS on the symbol of {1,5,7,10} of the first time domain pattern indicating DMRS, and the first terminal apparatus demodulates the DMRS on the symbol of {1,5,7,10} of the first time domain pattern indicating DMRS.

For another example, if the second AGC symbol is 3, the second terminal apparatus indicates that the first time domain pattern indicates that the symbol of the DMRS is {1,4,7,10}, the second terminal apparatus maps the DMRS on the symbol of {1,4,7,10} of the first time domain pattern indicating the DMRS, and the first terminal apparatus demodulates the DMRS on the symbol of {1,4,7,10} of the first time domain pattern indicating the DMRS.

In one embodiment, the AGC symbols in a slot are symbol a, symbol b, and symbol c, where a is less than b and b is less than c

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is symbol b, the DMRS symbol indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern is b, and the symbol mapped to the DMRS is b+q ₁ Or b-q ₂ 。

Optionally, the third AGC symbol is symbol c, the DMRS symbol indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern is c, and the symbol mapped to the DMRS is c+q ₁ Or is c-q ₂ 。

Optionally, the second terminal apparatus starts transmitting the SL information from the first AGC symbol (symbol a), and the DMRS position indicated by the DMRS first time domain patternCoincident with the second AGC symbol or the third AGC symbol, the symbol mapped to the DMRS is +.>Or +.>

Optionally, the second terminal device starts transmitting the SL information from the second AGC symbol (symbol b), the DMRS position indicated by the DMRS first time domain patternCoincident with the third AGC symbol, the symbol mapped to DMRS is +.>Or +.>

Optionally, for satisfyingThe symbol mapped DMRS is +.>Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is +.>Alternatively, the symbol mapping DMRS is b+q ₁ Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is b-q ₂ . Wherein the first AGC symbol is symbol a, the second AGC symbol is symbol b, the third AGC symbol is symbol c, and the DMRS first time domain pattern indicates the position of the DMRS

Optionally, for satisfyingThe symbol mapped DMRS is +.>Alternatively, the symbols mapping the DMRS areAlternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is c+q ₁ Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is c-q ₂ . Wherein the first AGC symbol is symbol a, the second AGC symbol is symbol b, the third AGC symbol is symbol c, and the first time domain pattern of the DMRS indicates the position of the DMRS>

Optionally, for satisfyingThe symbol mapped DMRS is +. >Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is +.>Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is c+q ₁ Alternatively, the symbol mapped DMRS is c-q ₂ . Wherein the first AGC symbol is symbol a, the second AGC symbol is symbol b, the third AGC symbol is symbol c, and the DMRS first time domain pattern indicates the position of the DMRS

Wherein q ₁ The value of (2) is an integer from 0 to 14. For example q ₁ =1. For another example, q ₁ The value of (a) being indicated by the network device to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or q ₁ Is preconfigured to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or q ₁ Is predefined.

Wherein q ₂ The value of (2) is an integer from 0 to 14. For example q ₂ =1. For another example, q ₂ The value of (a) being indicated by the network device to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or q ₂ The value is preconfigured to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or q ₁ Is predefined.

Wherein the DMRS first time domain pattern may be indicated by SCI.

For example: if the second AGC symbol is 4, the second terminal device indicates that the symbol indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern is {1,4,7,10}, the second terminal device maps the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern {1,5,7,10}, and accordingly, the first terminal device demodulates the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern {1,5,7,10 }.

For another example: if the second AGC symbol is 3, the second terminal device indicates that the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern is {1,4,7,10}, the second terminal device maps the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern {1,4,7,10}, and accordingly, the first terminal device demodulates the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern {1,4,7,10} of the DMRS.

For another example: if the third AGC symbol is 7, the second terminal device indicates that the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the DMRS is {1,4,7,10}, the second terminal device maps the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern {1,4,8,10}, and accordingly, the first terminal device demodulates the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern {1,4,8,10 }. For another example: if the third AGC symbol is 6, the second terminal device indicates that the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern is {1,4,7,10}, the second terminal device maps the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern {1,4,7,10}, and accordingly, the first terminal device demodulates the DMRS on the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern {1,4,7,10} of the DMRS.

Method 5: the DMRS pattern table (i.e., the second time domain pattern) is updated according to the AGC symbol positions.

In method 5, the first terminal device may, based on the indication of the second time domain pattern, generate a second time domain patternOr symbol(s)Wherein the second time domain pattern may not include the second AGC symbol, and the second time domain pattern may be determined according to the first time domain pattern and the position of the second AGC symbol.

In one embodiment, the second AGC symbol may be any one of {3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14 }. Wherein the position of the second AGC symbol may be indicated by the network device to the first terminal device and/or the second terminal device, or pre-configured to the first terminal device or the second terminal device, or pre-defined.

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 3, the location of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 12 or table 13.

Table 12

TABLE 13

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 4, the location of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column of table 14 or table 15. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

TABLE 14

TABLE 15

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 5, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 16 or table 17. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

Table 16

TABLE 17

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 6, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 18 or table 19. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

TABLE 18

TABLE 19

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 7, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 20 or table 21. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

Table 20

Table 21

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 8, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 22 or table 23. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

Table 22

/>

Table 23

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 9, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 24 or table 25. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

Table 24

Table 25

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 10, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 26 or table 27. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

Table 26

Table 27

Optionally, the second AGC symbol is 11, the position of the DMRS symbolDerived from at least any one row and/or at least any one column in table 28 or table 29. Optionally, the first AGC symbol is 0.

Table 28

Table 29

The following describes a decoding method of the first terminal device, which may be used alone or in combination with the above-described methods 1 to 5 for avoiding the influence on channel estimation and decoding.

As shown in fig. 22, the DMRS is located at symbols {1,6,11}, and the first AGC symbol and the second AGC symbol are located at symbols {0,4}, respectively. The DMRS of symbol 1 is used to demodulate the PSSCH on symbols 1, 2, 3 and the DMRS of symbols 6,11 is used to demodulate the PSSCH on symbols 5-12. That is, the PSSCH on symbols 5-12 is not demodulated with the DMRS of symbol 1, or the PSSCH on symbols 1, 2, 3 is not demodulated with the DMRS of symbols 6, 11.

Alternatively, the side row data information may be a PSSCH, such as the PSSCH on the a-th symbol, a being an integer.

Optionally, the DMRS is PSSCH DMRS.

It should be understood that in the above method, the side line data information may correspond to the same candidate start symbol, and the DMRS after the candidate start symbol is used to demodulate the side line data information. For example, the candidate start symbol is the first AGC symbol or the second AGC symbol, and for example, the candidate start symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol. For another example, the candidate start symbol is the i-th symbol or the j-th symbol.

The side line data information corresponds to the same candidate start symbol, which may be understood that the side line data information is the side line data information after the candidate start symbol, and/or the side line data information is the side line data information before the next candidate start symbol.

It should also be appreciated that the side row data information carried on the symbol preceding the candidate start symbol is demodulated according to the DMRS preceding the candidate start symbol and/or the side row data information carried on the symbol following the candidate start symbol is demodulated according to the DMRS following the candidate start symbol. For example, the candidate start symbol is the first AGC symbol or the second AGC symbol, and for example, the candidate start symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol. For another example, the candidate start symbol is the i-th symbol or the j-th symbol.

Optionally, the method comprises the step of. A first symbol (a first candidate start symbol) and a second symbol (a second candidate start symbol) are included in the first slot. The DMRS preceding the second symbol in the first slot is used to demodulate the PSSCH preceding the second symbol in the first slot and/or the DMRS following the second symbol in the first slot is used to demodulate the PSSCH following the second symbol in the first slot.

Wherein, before the second symbol in the first slot may be further understood as after the first symbol and before the second symbol. Wherein the second symbol in the first slot is also understood to be after the second symbol and before the mth symbol, or after the second symbol and before the M-1 symbol.

Since AGC on the second symbol causes phase discontinuity, PSSCH after the second symbol cannot be demodulated according to PSSCH DMRS before the second symbol, otherwise demodulation errors occur. Otherwise, in the same way, the PSSCH before the second symbol cannot be demodulated according to PSSCH DMRS after the second symbol, and the demodulation result can be more accurate by the method provided by the embodiment of the application, so that the reliability of the communication system is ensured.

In one embodiment, the above method may be combined with the locationThe method for mapping symbols of DMRS is combined, for example, taking the symbol {4,10} indicated by the DMRS first time domain pattern, the second AGC symbol being the symbol 4 as an example, if the position +.>To map the symbol of the DMRS, the PSSCH before the second symbol may not have a corresponding DMRS, and thus the PSSCH before the second symbol cannot be decoded. However, if the position is #)>For mapping the symbols of the DMRS, the PSSCH before and after the second AGC symbol has a corresponding DMRS for demodulation. In this way, the demodulation result can be more accurate,further ensuring the reliability of the communication system.

It should be understood that in this application, the first symbol, the i-th symbol, the first candidate start symbol, and the first AGC symbol may refer to the same meaning and may be used interchangeably; the second symbol, the j-th symbol, the second candidate start symbol and the second AGC symbol and the first second AGC symbol may refer to the same meaning and may be used interchangeably.

The above describes the problems and solutions that exist when there are multiple AGC symbols in a slot, and the problems and solutions that exist in the preemption check and re-assessment process during SL transmission are described below in connection with fig. 23-28.

Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of overlapping first resources and second resources in a preemption procedure according to an embodiment of the present application.

In the SL transmission, resource allocation is performed based on priority. In fig. 23, the first resource reserved by the terminal device 1 and the second resource reserved by the terminal device 2 overlap, and the first resource and the second resource are both located in the slot M, and the priority level of the terminal device 1 is higher (p=2) and the priority level of the terminal device 2 is lower (p=5) according to the preemption check (abbreviated as preemption) mechanism of the standard R16. Therefore, the terminal device 2 reselects the second resource of the slot m after detecting the reservation of the terminal device 1, i.e. the second resource is no longer used for transmission. As a result, the terminal device 1 transmits on the first resource, and the terminal device 2 transmits on the other resources. Thereby avoiding resource collision and ensuring the reliability of high-priority service.

However, in unlicensed spectrum, the terminal device may continuously transmit for a period of time (e.g., several slots in succession) after LBT is successful, which may be referred to as COT. This terminal device may be referred to as an initial COT terminal device, a start terminal device (Initiating Device), or a supervisory terminal device (Supervising Device). If the other terminal device satisfies a certain condition, the terminal device may share the COT, that is, transmit the SL information on the COT, and the shared terminal device may be referred to as a shared terminal device, a response terminal device (Responding Device), or a supervised terminal device (Initiating Device).

For example, the conditions for sharing COT are: the receiving terminal device sharing SL information transmitted by the terminal device of the COT is an initial terminal device, or the receiving terminal device sharing SL information transmitted by the terminal device of the COT includes an initial terminal device.

As shown in fig. 24, the SL information of terminal apparatus 2 is transmitted to terminal apparatus 3, and the SL information of terminal apparatus 1 is not transmitted to terminal apparatus 3. At this time, the terminal device 2 can transmit SL information on the COT. The terminal device 1 cannot transmit SL information on the COT. If terminal device 3 initiates a COT in time slot n, it may instruct terminal device 2 to transmit SL information on the COT (including transmitting information on time slot m), and since terminal device 1 is unable to transmit SL information on the COT, terminal device 1 is unable to transmit SL information on time slot m.

This causes a contradictory result that according to the preemption mechanism of R16, it is the terminal device 1 that transmits SL information in time slot m, and the terminal device 2 reselects the resources of time slot m. In contrast, according to the COT sharing condition, it is to be assumed that the terminal apparatus 2 transmits SL information in the slot m, and the terminal apparatus 1 reselects the resource of the slot m.

Similarly, the contradictory results described above also occur for the resource re-assessment process.

Fig. 25 is a schematic diagram of sharing resources of a slot m to a terminal device 2 by the COT indication information provided in the embodiment of the present application.

As shown in fig. 25, the priority level of the terminal apparatus 1 is higher (p=2), and the priority level of the terminal apparatus 2 is lower (p=5). The terminal device 2 detects that the terminal device 1 wants to transmit using the first resource, and the terminal device 2 does not use the second resource any more. As a result, the terminal device 1 transmits on the first resource, and the terminal device 2 transmits on the other resources.

However, in the presence of the COT sharing, a contradictory result may occur, and as shown in fig. 26, according to the re-evaluation mechanism of R16, the terminal device 1 determines the RSRP of the resource where the transmission of the reserved second resource is located, and if the RSRP measured value of the terminal device 2 is lower than the threshold value, the terminal device 1 may use the first resource; in accordance with the COT sharing condition, the receiving terminal device of the terminal device 1 is not the terminal device 3, and the terminal device 1 cannot transmit SL information using the first resource on the COT.

It should be appreciated that the reevaluation and preemption checks differ in that: for the preemption check, the terminal device 1 reserves the first resource through the SCI, and for the reevaluation, the terminal device 1 intends to use the first reserved resource transmission, reevaluates whether the first resource is available for use before the transmission.

The embodiment of the application provides an information transmission method and device, which can solve the contradiction problem between preemption check and reevaluation and COT sharing, thereby avoiding resource collision and unnecessary resource reselection.

Fig. 27 is a schematic flowchart of another method for information transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application, where method 2600 may include the following steps:

s2701, the channel occupation time COT shared information is received.

Reception may also be understood as monitoring (detect).

The COT sharing information indicates that a first COT is used for transmitting side line information of the second terminal device, and the first COT is the COT of the second terminal device or the third terminal device.

S2702, second side line control information SCI transmitted by the second terminal device is received.

The second SCI indicates a second resource, the second resource overlaps with a first resource, and the first resource is a resource used for sidestream information transmission by the first terminal device;

The first resource determining a resource for transmission of the side information for the first terminal device may be understood as determining that the resource for transmission is not necessarily actually used, and determining whether the first terminal device uses the first resource to transmit the side information according to other conditions, for example, determining whether the first terminal device performs preemption check or re-evaluation.

Wherein the second resource overlapping the first resource comprises at least any one of:

the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in time domain; or,

the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource frequency domain; or,

the frequency domain of the RB set where the first resource and the second resource are located is overlapped or partially overlapped; or,

the first COT frequency domain where the first resource and the second resource are located is overlapped or partially overlapped; or,

the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the first COT time domain where the second resource is located.

The above overlapping methods may be combined in at least any one of the above. For example, the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the time domain, and the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the frequency domain. For another example, the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the time domain, and the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the RB set in which the second resource is located in the frequency domain. For another example, the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the second resource in the time domain, and the first resource overlaps or partially overlaps with the first COT frequency domain where the second resource is located.

S2703, determining that the sidestream information is not transmitted on the first resource according to the COT sharing information and the second SCI.

In a possible implementation manner, the COT sharing information does not indicate that the first terminal device shares the first COT.

In a possible implementation manner, the determining that the sidestream information is not transmitted on the first resource according to the COT sharing information and the second SCI includes: determining that the first terminal device is not transmitting information on the first resource if the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In a possible implementation manner, the determining whether to transmit sidestream information on the first resource according to the COT sharing information includes: and determining that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource in the case that the demodulation reference signal measurement value of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

In a possible implementation manner, the determining, by the first resource, a resource for sidestream information transmission for the first terminal device includes: the first resource is a resource indicated by a first SCI of the first terminal device, and/or the first resource is a resource selected by the first terminal device for transmitting the sidestream information.

In a possible implementation manner, the COT sharing information is not earlier than a first time in a time domain, where the first time is a first time slot where the first resource is located minus a first duration, and/or the COT sharing information is not later than a second time in a time domain, where the second time is a first time slot where the first resource is located minus a second duration.

In a possible implementation manner, the time-frequency resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT, and/or the time-frequency resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT.

The information transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described above with the first terminal device as a main body, and the information transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described below with the second terminal device as a main body.

Fig. 28 is a schematic flowchart of another method for transmitting information provided in an embodiment of the present application, and a method 2700 may include the following steps:

s2801, second sidestream control information SCI is transmitted.

The second SCI indicates a second resource, where the second resource overlaps with a first resource, and the first resource is a resource used for sidestream information transmission by the first terminal device.

S2802, receiving channel occupation time COT shared information; and transmitting sidestream information on a first COT according to the COT sharing information, wherein the first COT is the COT of the second terminal device or the third terminal device.

And S2803, determining that the side line information is transmitted on the second resource according to the COT sharing information.

In a possible implementation manner, the determining to transmit sidestream information on the second resource according to the COT sharing information includes: determining that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource when the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold value, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold value; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In a possible implementation manner, the determining to transmit sidestream information on the second resource according to the COT sharing information includes: and determining that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource under the condition that the measured value of the demodulation reference signal of the second resource is smaller than or equal to a third threshold value.

The following describes in detail a method for solving the contradiction problem between preemption check and COT sharing in the preemption check scenario. The method may be a specific implementation of method 2700 and method 2800 in a preemptive check scenario.

First, a scenario of preemption check is described: the first terminal device, the second terminal device and the third terminal device are all terminal devices in the resource pool. Wherein the first resources reserved by the first terminal device and the second resources reserved by the second terminal device overlap. The overlapping includes partial overlapping and/or total overlapping.

Optionally, the first resource and the second resource are both located in time slot m. The first resource is indicated by a first SCI of the first terminal device. The second resource is indicated by a second SCI of the second terminal device.

After the success of the third terminal device LBT, it may continue to transmit for a period of time, which is referred to as the first COT. The first COT may be used for transmission by the third terminal device, or may be used for transmission by other terminal devices. The third terminal device transmits COT instruction information for instructing the second terminal device to share the first COT. Wherein the third terminal device and the second terminal device may be the same terminal device. That is, the COT instruction information of the third terminal apparatus instructs itself to transmit its own SL information within the first COT.

Optionally, the COT sharing information indicates that the second terminal device shares the first COT includes a second resource transmission of the second terminal device in the first COT.

In one possible implementation, the first terminal device may determine whether the first resource is preempted based on the first SCI, the second SCI, and the COT sharing information. Alternatively, the first terminal device may determine whether the first resource is preempted based on the second SCI and COT shared information.

Wherein the first terminal device may determine that the first resource is preempted according to at least one of the following conditions: the first resource indicated by the first SCI and the second resource indicated by the second SCI overlap, the time domain resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT, and the time domain resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT and the COT sharing information indicates that the second terminal device shares the first COT.

Wherein, the above-mentioned COT sharing information may belong to a first time window.

Wherein the overlapping of the first resource and the second resource comprises at least any one of:

Optionally, the starting position of the first time window is a time slot m-T _a Or time slot m-T _a +1; alternatively, the start bit of the first time windowNot earlier than time slot m-T _a Or time slot m-T _a +1. Wherein the time slot m is the time slot where the first resource is located, T _a Is a first time interval.

Optionally, the first time interval is the maximum number of timeslots of the COT; or the longest duration of COT times 2 ^μ Where μ indicates the subcarrier spacing (see table 2 for details).

Optionally, the first time interval is a preconfigured or network configured value, where the configured value is greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to the maximum number of timeslots of the COT; or the longest duration of COT times 2 ^μ 。

Optionally, the ending position of the first time window is a time slot m-T ₃ . Wherein the time slot m is the time slot where the first resource is located, T ₃ The value of (2) is related to SCS. Alternatively T ₃ And when mu is equal to 0, 1, 2 and 3, the time slots are respectively 3, 5, 9 and 17.

Wherein the first terminal device may determine that the first resource is not preempted or may determine that the first resource may be preempted based on at least any one of the following conditions: the first resource indicated by the first SCI overlaps with the second resource indicated by the second SCI, the priority value indicated by the first SCI is greater than or equal to the priority value indicated by the second SCI, the priority value indicated by the first SCI is greater than or equal to the priority threshold, and the priority value indicated by the second SCI is less than or equal to the priority threshold.

Optionally, the method for determining that the first resource overlaps the second resource is described above, and is not described herein.

In one possible implementation, the first terminal device may determine that the first resource is not preempted based on not detecting the COT sharing information, or when the detected COT sharing information does not indicate that the second terminal device shares the first COT.

Optionally, the lack of the COT sharing information indicating the second terminal device to share the first COT includes the lack of the COT sharing information within the first time window indicating the second terminal device to share the first COT.

In this embodiment, after the first terminal device determines that the second terminal device can share the first COT, the first terminal device does not transmit on the first resource even if the priority value indicated by the SCI of the first terminal device is small.

In one possible implementation, the second terminal device may determine whether the second resource is preempted based on the first SCI, the second SCI, and the COT shared information.

Wherein the second terminal device may determine that the second resource is preempted according to at least one of the following conditions: the first resource indicated by the first SCI overlaps with the second resource indicated by the second SCI, the priority value indicated by the first SCI is less than or equal to the priority value indicated by the second SCI, the priority value indicated by the first SCI is less than or equal to the priority threshold, and the priority value indicated by the second SCI is greater than or equal to the priority threshold.

Wherein the second terminal device determines that the second resource is not preempted or that the second resource can be preempted based on at least any one of the following conditions: the first resource indicated by the first SCI overlaps with the second resource indicated by the second SCI, the COT sharing information indicates that the second terminal device shares the first COT, and the time domain resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT.

Optionally, the second terminal device shares the first COT, including: and for the frequency domain bandwidth of the second resource to be greater than or equal to the frequency domain bandwidth of the first COT, the second terminal device transmits at the time domain position of the second resource according to the frequency domain bandwidth of the first COT or less.

In one possible implementation, the second terminal device may determine that the second resource is preempted based on not detecting the COT sharing information, or the COT sharing information does not indicate that the second terminal device shares the first COT.

The following describes a method for solving the problem of contradiction between preemption checks and COT sharing in a reevaluation scenario. The method may be a specific implementation of method 2700 and method 2800 in a reevaluation scenario.

First, a re-evaluation scenario is described: the first terminal device, the second terminal device and the third terminal device are all terminal devices in the resource pool. Wherein the first resource selected by the first terminal device overlaps with the second resource reserved by the second terminal device. The overlapping includes partial overlapping and/or total overlapping.

Optionally, the first resource and the second resource are both located in a time slot m. The second resource is indicated by a second SCI of the second terminal device.

After the success of the third terminal device LBT, it may continue to transmit for a period of time, which is referred to as the first COT. The first COT may be used for transmission by the third terminal device, or may be used for transmission by other terminal devices. The third terminal device transmits COT instruction information for instructing the second terminal device to share the first COT. Wherein, namely the COT indication information of the third terminal device indicates itself to transmit own SL information in the first COT.

In one possible implementation, the first terminal device may determine whether to reevaluate the first resource based on the first SCI, the second SCI, and the COT sharing information.

Wherein the first terminal device determines to re-evaluate the first resource according to at least any one of the following conditions: the first resource overlaps with a second resource indicated by the second SCI, a time domain resource of the first resource belongs to the first COT, and a time domain resource of the second resource belongs to the first COT and the COT sharing information indicates that the second terminal device shares the first COT.

Optionally, the starting position of the first time window is a time slot m-T _a Or time slot m-T _a +1; alternatively, the first time window starts at a position not earlier than the time slot m-T _a Or time slot m-T _a +1. Wherein the time slot m is the time slot where the first resource is located，T _a Is a first time interval.

Wherein the first terminal device may determine that the first resource is evaluated or that the first resource may be used based on at least any one of the following conditions: the first resource overlaps with a second resource indicated by the second SCI, and the RSRP measurement of the second resource is not above the RSRP threshold.

Optionally, the RSRP threshold is determined according to a priority of the first terminal device selection resource and a priority indicated by the second SCI.

In one possible implementation, the first terminal device may determine that the first resource passes the evaluation, or that the first resource may be used, based on not detecting the COT sharing information, or that the COT sharing information does not instruct the second terminal device to share the first COT.

Optionally, the absence of detection of the COT shared information includes absence of detection of the COT shared information within the first time window.

In this embodiment, the first terminal device determines that the second terminal device can share the first COT, and the first terminal device does not transmit on the first resource even if the RSRP measurement value indicated by the first terminal device SCI is small.

Embodiments of the present application also provide an apparatus for implementing any of the above methods, for example, an apparatus including a unit (or means) for implementing each step performed by the apparatus or the vehicle in any of the above methods.

Fig. 29 is a schematic diagram of an information transmission apparatus 2900 provided in an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus 2900 may include a transceiver unit 2910, a storage unit 2920, and a processing unit 2930. The transceiver unit 2910 may implement a function of receiving and transmitting instructions and/or data, and the transceiver unit 2910 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a communication unit. The memory unit 2920 is used to implement a corresponding memory function and store corresponding instructions and/or data. The processing unit 2930 is used for performing data processing. The processing unit 2930 may read instructions and/or data in the storage unit 2920 to cause the apparatus 2900 to implement the foregoing method embodiments.

As one design, apparatus 2900 may be configured to perform actions performed by a receiving terminal device (first terminal device) in method 1000.

In one possible implementation, the apparatus 2900 includes: a processing unit 2930, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first slot, where the first slot includes M symbols, and the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and a transceiver 2910, configured to receive the sidelink information in the first timeslot according to a time domain position of a start symbol in the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, where the start symbol is a start symbol for transmitting the sidelink information.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to perform automatic gain control AGC on an i-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, where i is an integer less than M, where no side line control information and/or demodulation reference signal exists in a first time range before the i-th symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to not perform AGC on a j-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, where the j-th symbol is located after an i-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, and detects side line control information and/or demodulation reference signals in a second time range after the i-th symbol, where i and j are integers less than M.

In a possible implementation manner, the start symbol is an ith symbol, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to determine that the sidelink information carried on the jth symbol is sidelink control information and/or sidelink data information, where the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and j are integers less than M.

In a possible implementation manner, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to determine, according to a first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to determine that the ith symbol is a starting symbol for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or demodulation reference signal in a third time range after the ith symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the j-th symbol is a symbol that does not map the demodulation reference signal; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver unit 2910 is configured to receive an SCI from the second terminal device, where the SCI indicates the first time domain pattern, or the SCI indicates the second time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, or the demodulation reference signal mapped on the j-th symbol is a demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₁ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j symbol does not include demodulation reference signals, the j+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol not including the first time domain pattern indication on the j-th symbol, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the lateral information on the jth symbol is a copy of the lateral information on the xth symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not a symbol for mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the j-th symbol does not comprise the demodulation reference signal; or, the xth symbol is a mapped demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is a copy of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the xth symbolNumber j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to, at the j+q th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to, at the j+q, perform processing according to a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating the demodulation reference signal on a symbol basis; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to decode the sideline data information carried on a symbol before the jth symbol according to a demodulation reference signal before the jth symbol, and/or decode the sideline data information carried on a symbol after the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the jth symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to map the sideline data information according to a symbol index and then according to a resource unit index; and/or mapping the side line data information according to the index in the code block and then according to the resource unit index.

As one design, apparatus 2900 may be configured to perform actions performed by a transmitting terminal device (second terminal device) in method 1100.

In one possible implementation, the apparatus 2900 includes: the device comprises: a processing unit 2930, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first slot, where the first slot includes M symbols, and the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information; and a transceiver 2910, configured to send the sideline information in the first slot according to a time domain position of a start symbol in the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information, where the start symbol is a start symbol for transmitting the sideline information.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to determine, according to a first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field; wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or configured by a network device to a second terminal device, the ith symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a non-mapped demodulation reference signalThe sign of the number; or the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the j-th symbol; or the j-th symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The symbols are symbols mapping the demodulation reference signal, wherein q is as follows ₁ Or q ₂ Is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the demodulation reference signal mapped on the j-th symbol is the demodulation of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern A reference signal of the (j+q) ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j symbol does not include demodulation reference signals, the j+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol not including the first time domain pattern indication on the j-th symbol, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the xth symbol is the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ And a symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to, at the j+q th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to, at the j+q, perform processing according to a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

As one design, apparatus 2900 may be configured to perform actions performed by a receiving terminal device (first terminal device) in method 1200.

In one possible implementation, the apparatus 2900 includes: the device comprises: a processing unit 2930, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting side line information in a first timeslot, where the first timeslot includes M symbols, where the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is a start symbol for transmitting the side line information, an jth symbol is a symbol for transmitting copy of side line control information and/or copy of side line data information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol, the i and j are integers less than M, and the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information include the ith symbol and the jth symbol; and a transceiver 2910, configured to receive the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

In a possible implementation manner, a position of the jth symbol in the first slot is a fixed value.

In a possible implementation manner, the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sideline information comprise a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the j-th symbol is a symbol for copying transmission side line control information and/or copying side line data information, and includes: the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the first symbol after the jth symbol; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the last symbol before the j-th symbol; or, the sidestream information of the jth symbol is a copy of the xth symbol carrying the sidestream control information, and/or a copy of the xth symbol of the sidestream data information, where x is any integer from 0 to 13; or, the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of the sidestream data information.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol mapping the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q symbol is ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, the jth+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the j symbol does not include demodulation reference signals, the j+q symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping on individual symbolsIs the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; or the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol not including the first time domain pattern indication on the j-th symbol, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to determine, according to a second field, a first number of symbols in the first timeslot; the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured to a first terminal device by a network device, or indicated to the first terminal device by a second terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

In a possible implementation manner, the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, including: the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after a first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after the first second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a second value; and/or the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, wherein the value of the second field is a third value.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-1、Len ₁ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-1、Len-S ₂ -X-1、Len–S ₁ Any one of the following items' -X-1, wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' value indicated for second start field or the first symbol and the second symbolThe symbol interval of the number, X, is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-2、Len ₁ ’-X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-2、Len-S ₂ -X-2、Len–S ₁ Any one of' -X-2; the value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₃ -X-1、Len ₂ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₃ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ ’-X-1、Len-S ₃ -X-1、Len–S ₂ Any one of' -X-1; wherein Len, len0', len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ Value indicated for the second length field, len ₃ Value indicated for the third length field, len ₁ ' value indicated for first and second Length field, len ₂ ' value indicated for second length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval between said first symbol and a first of said second symbols, S ₃ A value indicated for a third start field or a symbol interval between the first symbol and a second of the second symbols, S ₁ ' the value indicated by the first and second start fields or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbols, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, and the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, where the first symbol is a first symbol The number is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any one of' +3) -X; wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -5)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -5)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +5)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any of' +5) -X;

the second field has the third value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₃ )–X-2、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₂ ’)–X-2、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₃ )–X-2、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ ’)-X-2、Len-0.5*S ₃ -X-2、Len-0.5*S ₂ Any one of' -X-2; wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ Indicating for the second length fieldValue of Len ₃ Value indicated for the third length field, len ₁ ' value indicated for first and second Length field, len ₂ ' value indicated for second length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval between said first symbol and a first of said second symbols, S ₃ A value indicated for a third start field or a symbol interval between the first symbol and a second of the second symbols, S ₁ ' the value indicated by the first and second start fields or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbols, S ₂ ' is the second initial field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

As one design, apparatus 2900 may be configured to perform actions performed by a transmitting terminal apparatus in method 1300.

In one possible implementation, the apparatus 2900 includes: a processing unit 2930, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting side line information in a first timeslot, where the first timeslot includes M symbols, where the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is a start symbol for transmitting the side line information, an jth symbol is a symbol for transmitting copy of side line control information and/or copy of side line data information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol, the i and j are integers less than M, and the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information include the ith symbol and the jth symbol; and a transceiver 2910, configured to send the sidestream information in the first slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol that does not map a demodulation reference signal, or a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal does not include the jth symbol, or the jth symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and the jth+q or j-q symbol is a symbol that maps the demodulation reference signal, where q is a positive integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by a first time domain pattern of a demodulation reference signal, and the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth+q or j-q symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, or the jth symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, and the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth+q or j-q symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; wherein q is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to map the demodulation reference signal on the j+q or j-q symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal, or the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; the demodulation reference signal mapped on the j+q or j-q symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the jth symbol is a symbol mapped to the demodulation reference signal, or the demodulation reference signal mapped on the jth symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, or the jth symbol does not include a demodulation reference signal, or the jth symbol does not include the demodulation reference signal of the jth symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern; the demodulation reference signal mapped on the j+q or j-q symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern.

In a possible implementation manner, the lateral information on the jth symbol is a copy of the lateral information on the xth symbol, including: the x-th symbol is not the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, and the j-th symbol does not include a demodulation reference signal; or the xth symbol is the symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, and the demodulation reference signal on the jth symbol is the duplication of the demodulation reference signal on the xth symbol.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is further configured to map the demodulation reference signal on the j+q or j-q symbol according to a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal; wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, and q is an integer less than or equal to M.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-1、Len ₁ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-1、Len-S ₂ -X-1、Len–S ₁ Any one of the following items' -X-1, wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and two second symbols, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-3、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-3 and Len-X-3; the value of the second field is the second value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₂ -X-2、Len ₁ ’-X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ -X-2、Len+S ₁ -S ₁ ’-X-2、Len-S ₂ -X-2、Len–S ₁ Any one of' -X-2; the value of the second field is the third value, and the first number of symbols is Len ₃ -X-1、Len ₂ ’-X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₃ -X-1、Len+S ₁ -S ₂ ’-X-1、Len-S ₃ -X-1、Len–S ₂ Any one of' -X-1; wherein Len, len0', len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ Value indicated for the second length field, len ₃ Value indicated for the third length field, len ₁ ' value indicated for first and second Length field, len ₂ ' value indicated for second length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ Is the second initial wordThe value of the segment indication or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and the second symbol, S ₃ A value indicated for a third start field or a symbol interval between the first symbol and a second of the second symbols, S ₁ ' the value indicated by the first and second start fields or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the first and second symbols, S ₂ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

In a possible implementation manner, the first slot includes one first symbol and one second symbol, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to use the value of the second field as the first value, and the number of the first symbols is Len ₁ -X-2、Len ₀ Any one of' -X-2 and Len-X-2; the second field has a value of the second value, and the first number of symbols is 0.5 (Len ₁ +Len ₂ -3)-X、0.5*(Len ₀ ’+Len ₁ ’-3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₂ -3)-X、Len+0.5*(S ₁ -S ₁ ’-3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₂ +3)-X、Len-0.5*(S ₁ Any one of' +3) -X; wherein Len, len ₀ ’、Len ₁ Value indicated for the first length field, len ₂ 、Len ₁ ' value indicated for second Length field, S ₁ Value indicated for the first start field, S ₂ A value indicated for a second start field or a symbol interval of the first symbol and the second symbol, S ₁ ' is the value indicated by the second start field or the symbol interval between the first symbol and the second symbol, and X is the number of GAP symbols in the first slot.

As one design, the apparatus 2900 may be configured to perform the actions performed by the first terminal device in the method 2500.

In one possible implementation, the apparatus 2900 includes: a transceiver 2910, configured to receive channel occupation time COT sharing information, where the COT sharing information indicates that a first COT is used for transmission side information of a second terminal device, and the first COT is a COT of the second terminal device or a third terminal device; the transceiver 2910 is further configured to receive second sidestream control information SCI sent by a second terminal device, where the second SCI indicates a second resource, the second resource overlaps with a first resource, and the first resource determines a resource for sidestream information transmission for the first terminal device; a processing unit 2930 is configured to determine not to transmit sidestream information on the first resource based on the COT sharing information and the second SCI.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to determine that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource when the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to determine that the first terminal device does not transmit information on the first resource when the measured value of the demodulation reference signal of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

As one design, apparatus 2900 may be configured to perform the actions performed by the first terminal device in method 2600.

In one possible implementation, the apparatus 2900 includes: a transceiver unit 2910, configured to send second sidestream control information SCI, where the second SCI indicates a second resource, where the second resource overlaps with a first resource, where the first resource is a resource used by a first terminal device for sidestream information transmission, and the transceiver unit 2910 is further configured to receive channel occupation time COT sharing information; transmitting sidestream information on a first COT according to the COT sharing information, wherein the first COT is the COT of a second terminal device or a third terminal device; a processing unit 2930 is configured to determine, according to the COT sharing information, transmission side line information on the second resource.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to determine that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource when the first priority value is less than or equal to the second priority value, and/or the first priority value is less than or equal to the first threshold value, and/or the second priority value is greater than the first threshold value; the first priority value is a priority value of the first terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the first resource, and the second priority value is a priority value of the second terminal device transmitting the sidestream information on the second resource.

In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2930 is specifically configured to determine that the second terminal device transmits information on the second resource if the measured value of the demodulation reference signal of the second resource is less than or equal to a third threshold value.

It should be understood that the division of the units in the above apparatus is only a division of a logic function, and may be fully or partially integrated into one physical entity or may be physically separated. Furthermore, units in the apparatus may be implemented in the form of processor-invoked software; the device comprises, for example, a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the memory having instructions stored therein, the processor invoking the instructions stored in the memory to perform any of the methods or to perform the functions of the units of the device, wherein the processor is, for example, a general purpose processor, such as a graphics processor or a microprocessor, and the memory is either internal to the device or external to the device. Alternatively, the units in the apparatus may be implemented in the form of hardware circuits, and the functions of some or all of the units may be implemented by the design of hardware circuits, which may be understood as one or more processors; for example, in one implementation, the hardware circuit is an ASIC, and the functions of some or all of the above units are implemented by designing the logic relationships of the elements in the circuit; for another example, in another implementation, the hardware circuit may be implemented by a PLD, for example, an FPGA, which may include a large number of logic gates, and the connection relationship between the logic gates is configured by a configuration file, so as to implement the functions of some or all of the above units. All units of the above device may be realized in the form of processor calling software, or in the form of hardware circuits, or in part in the form of processor calling software, and in the rest in the form of hardware circuits.

Alternatively, the processing unit 2930 may be the processor 3020 in fig. 30, the storage unit 2920 may be the memory 3010 in fig. 30, and the transceiver unit 2910 may be the communication interface 3030 in fig. 30.

Fig. 30 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus 3000 of another information transmission apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.

The information transmission device 3000 includes: memory 3010, processor 3020, and communication interface 3030. The memory 3010, the processor 3020, and the communication interface 3030 are connected by an internal connection path, the memory 3010 is used for storing instructions, and the processor 3020 is used for executing the instructions stored in the memory 3010 to control the input/output interface 3030 to receive/transmit information. Alternatively, the memory 3010 may be coupled to the processor 3020 via an interface or integrated with the processor 3020.

Note that, the communication interface 3030 uses a transceiver device such as, but not limited to, a transceiver. The communication interface 3030 may also include an input/output interface (input/output interface).

Processor 3020 stores one or more computer programs, including instructions. When the instruction is executed by the processor 3020, the information transmission apparatus 3000 performs the method of information transmission in the above embodiments.

In implementation, the steps of the above method may be performed by integrated logic circuitry in hardware or instructions in software in the processor 3020. The method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be embodied directly in hardware processor execution or in a combination of hardware and software modules in a processor. The software modules may be located in a random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc. as well known in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 3010, and the processor 3020 reads information in the memory 3010 and performs the steps of the method described above in connection with its hardware. To avoid repetition, a detailed description is not provided herein.

Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer readable medium storing program code which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform any of the methods of fig. 10-28 described above.

The embodiment of the application also provides a chip, which comprises: at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor being coupled to the memory for reading and executing instructions in the memory to perform any of the methods of fig. 10-28 described above.

The embodiment of the application also provides an information transmission device, which comprises: at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor being coupled to the memory for reading and executing instructions in the memory to perform any of the methods of fig. 10-28 described above.

The embodiment of the application also provides a terminal device, which comprises any one of the information transmission devices in fig. 29 or fig. 30.

Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the various illustrative elements and algorithm steps described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein may be implemented as electronic hardware, or combinations of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether such functionality is implemented as hardware or software depends upon the particular application and design constraints imposed on the solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality in varying ways for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the present application.

It will be clear to those skilled in the art that, for convenience and brevity of description, specific working procedures of the above-described systems, apparatuses and units may refer to corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments, and are not repeated herein.

In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative, e.g., the division of the units is merely a logical function division, and there may be additional divisions when actually implemented, e.g., multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be omitted or not performed. Alternatively, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed with each other may be an indirect coupling or communication connection via some interfaces, devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other form.

The units described as separate units may or may not be physically separate, and units shown as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on a plurality of network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.

In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated in one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated in one unit.

The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as a stand-alone product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present application may be embodied essentially or in a part contributing to the prior art or in a part of the technical solution, in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application. And the aforementioned storage medium includes: a U-disk, a removable hard disk, a Read-Only Memory (ROM), a random access Memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, or other various media capable of storing program codes.

The foregoing is merely specific embodiments of the present application, but the scope of the present application is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think about changes or substitutions within the technical scope of the present application, and the changes and substitutions are intended to be covered by the scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims

1. An information transmission method, the method comprising:

determining N candidate starting symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, wherein M symbols are included in the first time slot, and the M symbols include N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information;

and receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:

and performing Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on an ith symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein i is an integer smaller than M, and sidestream control information and/or demodulation reference signals do not exist in a first time range before the ith symbol.

3. The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:

and not performing AGC on a j-th symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the j-th symbol is positioned after an i-th symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, sidestream control information and/or demodulation reference signals are detected in a second time range after the i-th symbol, and i and j are integers smaller than M.

4. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the start symbol is an i-th symbol, the method further comprising:

and determining that the sidestream information transmitted on the jth symbol is sidestream control information and/or sidestream data information, wherein the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and the j are integers smaller than M.

5. The method of claim 4 wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first time slot.

6. The method of claims 1-4, wherein the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information comprise: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

7. The method of claim 6, wherein the method further comprises:

determining a time domain position of the first symbol in the first time slot according to a first starting field; and/or

Determining a time domain position of the second symbol in the first time slot according to the first field;

wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or network means are configured to a first terminal device, the i-th symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the j-th symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

8. The method of any of claims 4 to 7, the determining a start symbol for transmitting the sidestream information comprising: and determining the ith symbol as a starting symbol for transmitting the sidestream control information when the sidestream control information and/or the demodulation reference signal exist in a third time range behind the ith symbol.

9. An information transmission method, the method comprising:

And transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information.

10. The method of claim 9, wherein the starting symbol is an i-th symbol, the method further comprising:

11. The method of claim 10, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first time slot.

12. The method of claims 9 to 11, wherein the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information comprise: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

13. The method of claim 12, wherein the method further comprises:

wherein the first start field and the first field are preconfigured or configured by a network device to a second terminal device, the ith symbol is the first symbol or the second symbol, and/or the jth symbol is the second symbol, the first field indicates a time domain position of the second symbol within the first slot, or the first field indicates a time domain position interval between the first symbol and the second symbol.

14. An information transmission method, the method comprising:

determining N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting side line information in a first time slot, wherein the first time slot comprises M symbols, the M symbols comprise N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is the initial symbol used for transmitting the side line information, the jth symbol is a symbol used for transmitting copy of the side line control information and/or copy of the side line data information, the jth symbol is positioned behind the ith symbol, the i and j are integers smaller than M, and the N candidate initial symbols used for transmitting the side line information comprise the ith symbol and the jth symbol;

And receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

15. The method of claim 14, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first slot.

16. The method of claim 14 or 15, wherein the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side row information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

17. The method of claim 16, wherein the method further comprises:

18. The method according to any of the claims 14 to 17, wherein the j-th symbol is a symbol of a copy of transmission side line control information and/or a copy of side line data information, comprising:

the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the first symbol after the jth symbol; or,

the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the duplication of the sidestream control information and/or the duplication of the sidestream data information on the last symbol before the j-th symbol; or,

the sidestream information of the jth symbol is the copy of the xth symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of the xth symbol of the sidestream data information, wherein x is any integer from 0 to 13; or,

the sidestream information of the j-th symbol is the copy of any one symbol carrying the sidestream control information and/or the copy of any one symbol of the sidestream data information.

19. The method of any one of claim 14 to 18, wherein,

the j-th symbol is a first time domain pattern finger of a demodulation reference signalThe symbols shown, the j+q th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, or,

the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on each symbol is the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern;

wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

20. The method of claim 19, wherein the method further comprises:

at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

21. The method of any one of claims 14 to 20, wherein the method further comprises:

at the j+q-th according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating the demodulation reference signal on a symbol basis;

wherein the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern does not include the jth symbol, the q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

22. The method of any one of claims 14 to 21, wherein the method further comprises:

decoding the side-row data information carried on the symbol preceding the jth symbol according to the demodulation reference signal preceding the jth symbol, and/or,

And decoding the sidelink data information carried on the symbol after the j symbol according to the demodulation reference signal after the j symbol.

23. The method of any one of claims 14 to 22, wherein the method further comprises:

determining a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to a second field;

the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured to a first terminal device by a network device, or indicated to the first terminal device by a second terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

24. The method of claim 23, wherein the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, comprising:

the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after a first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or

The first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after the first second symbol, and the value of the second field is a second value; and/or

And the first terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, and the value of the second field is a third value.

25. An information transmission method, the method comprising:

and transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

26. The method of claim 25, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first slot.

27. The method of claim 25 or 26, wherein the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information include a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

28. The method of claim 27, wherein the method further comprises:

29. The method according to any of claims 25 to 28, wherein the j symbols are symbols of a copy of transmission side row control information and/or a copy of side row data information, comprising:

30. The method of any one of claim 25 to 29,

the j-th symbol is a symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the j+q-th symbol ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal mapped on a symbol is a replica of the demodulation reference signal of the j-th symbol indicated by the first time domain pattern, or,

wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

31. The method of claim 30, wherein the method further comprises:

at the j+q ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

32. The method of any one of claims 25 to 31, further comprising:

at the j+q-th according to the symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol;

33. The method of any one of claims 25 to 32, wherein the method further comprises:

the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, the second field is preconfigured, or configured by a network device to a second terminal device, or indicated by the second terminal device to a first terminal device, and the first number of symbols is the number of symbols for transmitting the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information.

34. The method of claim 33, wherein the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, comprising:

the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a first symbol after the first symbol, and the value of the second field is a first value; and/or

The second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from a second symbol or a first symbol after a first second symbol, and the value of the second field is a second value; and/or

And the second terminal device starts to transmit the sidestream control information and/or the sidestream data information from the first symbol after the second symbol, and the value of the second field is a third value.

35. An information transmission apparatus, characterized in that the apparatus comprises:

a processing unit, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting sidestream information in a first time slot, where the first time slot includes M symbols, and the M symbols include the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information;

and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is used for transmitting the sidestream information.

36. The apparatus of claim 35, wherein the device comprises,

the processing unit is further configured to perform automatic gain control AGC on an i-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, where i is an integer smaller than M, where there is no sidelink control information and/or demodulation reference signal in a first time range before the i-th symbol.

37. The apparatus of claim 35, wherein the device comprises,

the processing unit is further configured to not perform AGC on a j-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, where the j-th symbol is located after an i-th symbol of the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, and detects side line control information and/or demodulation reference signals in a second time range after the i-th symbol, where i and j are integers less than M.

38. The apparatus according to any one of claims 35 to 37, wherein the start symbol is an i-th symbol,

the processing unit is further configured to determine that the sidelink information carried on the jth symbol is sidelink control information and/or sidelink data information, where the jth symbol and the ith symbol belong to the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidelink information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol in a time domain, and the i and j are integers less than M.

39. The apparatus of claim 38, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first time slot.

40. The apparatus of any of claims 35 to 38, wherein the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information comprise: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

41. The apparatus of claim 40, wherein,

the processing unit is further configured to determine, according to a first start field, a time domain position of the first symbol in the first slot; and/or

The processing unit is further configured to determine, according to the first field, a time domain position of the second symbol in the first slot;

42. The apparatus of any one of claims 38 to 41,

the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the ith symbol is a start symbol for transmitting the sidelink information when the sidelink control information and/or the demodulation reference signal exist in a third time range after the ith symbol.

43. An information transmission apparatus, characterized in that the apparatus comprises:

and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the time domain position of a starting symbol in the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the sidestream information, wherein the starting symbol is the starting symbol for transmitting the sidestream information.

44. The apparatus of claim 43, wherein the start symbol is an ith symbol,

45. The apparatus of claim 44, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first time slot.

46. The apparatus of claim 43 or 44, wherein the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the sidestream information comprise: first and second symbols, or one of said first and one of said second symbols, or one of said first and N-1 of said second symbols.

47. The apparatus of claim 46, wherein,

48. An information transmission apparatus, characterized in that the apparatus comprises:

a processing unit, configured to determine N candidate start symbols for transmitting side line information in a first slot, where the first slot includes M symbols, where the M symbols include N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information, an ith symbol in the M symbols is a start symbol for transmitting the side line information, an jth symbol is a symbol for transmitting copy of side line control information and/or copy of side line data information, the jth symbol is located after the ith symbol, the i and j are integers less than M, and the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side line information include the ith symbol and the jth symbol;

and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for receiving the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

49. The apparatus of claim 48, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first slot.

50. The apparatus of claim 48, wherein the N candidate start symbols for transmitting the side row information comprise a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

51. The apparatus of claim 50, wherein,

52. The apparatus according to any one of claims 48 to 51, wherein the j-th symbol is a symbol of a copy of transmission side row control information and/or a copy of side row data information, comprising:

53. The apparatus of claim 48 to 52,

Wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

54. The apparatus of claim 53, wherein,

the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signal is demodulated on a symbol basis.

55. The apparatus of any one of claims 48 to 54,

the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q, perform a demodulation according to a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Demodulating the demodulation reference signal on a symbol basis;

56. The apparatus of any one of claims 48 to 55,

the processing unit is further configured to:

57. The apparatus of any one of claims 48 to 56,

the processing unit is further configured to determine a first number of symbols in the first time slot according to a second field;

58. The apparatus of claim 57, wherein the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, comprising:

59. An information transmission apparatus, characterized in that the apparatus comprises:

and the receiving and transmitting unit is used for transmitting the sidestream information in the first time slot according to the j-th symbol time domain position.

60. The apparatus of claim 59, wherein the j-th symbol is located at a fixed value in the first slot.

61. The apparatus of claim 59, wherein the N candidate starting symbols for transmitting the side row information comprise a first symbol and a second symbol, or one of the first symbol and one of the second symbol, or one of the first symbol and N-1 of the second symbol.

62. The apparatus of claim 61, wherein,

63. The apparatus according to any one of claims 59 to 62, wherein the j symbols are symbols of a copy of transmission side row control information and/or a copy of side row data information, comprising:

64. The apparatus of any one of claims 59 to 63,

Wherein said q ₁ Or q ₂ Is an integer less than or equal to M.

65. The apparatus of claim 64, wherein,

the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q-th ₁ Or j-q ₂ The demodulation reference signals are mapped on individual symbols.

66. The apparatus of any one of claim 59 to 65,

the processing unit is further configured to, at the j+q, perform a demodulation according to a symbol indicated by the second time domain pattern of the demodulation reference signal ₁ Or j-q ₂ Mapping the demodulation reference signals on each symbol;

67. The apparatus of any one of claim 59 to 66,

68. The apparatus of claim 67, wherein the second field indicates an access overhead for transmitting the sidestream information, comprising:

69. An information transmission apparatus, characterized in that the apparatus comprises: at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor coupled with the memory to read and execute instructions in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 34.

70. A computer readable medium, characterized in that the computer readable medium stores a program code which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 34.

71. A chip, comprising: at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor coupled with the memory to read and execute instructions in the memory to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 34.